Bobcat 553 Service Manual SN 513011001-Above Europe Only - SN 513031001-Above

5 Service
5
Manual
S/N 513011001 & Above
Europe Only – S/N 513031001 & Above
3
EQUIPPED WITH
BOBCAT INTERLOCK
CONTROL SYSTEM (BICSTM)
6724024 (11–95) Printed in U.S.A. © Melroe Company 1995
MAINTENANCE SAFETY
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read and
understand the Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s Handbook and
WARNING signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals
when making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function after
adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death. W-2003-0903
Safety Alert Symbol: This symbol with a warning statement, means: “Warning, be alert! Your safety is
involved!” Carefully read the message that follows.
CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT
B-10731a B-12365 B-7469

Never service the Bobcat Skid- Use the correct procedure to lift or Cleaning and maintenance are
Steer Loader without instructions. lower operator cab. required daily.
WRONG WRONG WRONG
B-11799 B-15231 B-15280

Have good ventilation when Disconnecting or loosening any Never work on loader with lift
welding or grinding painted hydraulic tubeline, hose, fitting, arms up unless lift arms are held
parts. component or a part failure can by an approved lift arm support
Wear dust mask when grinding cause lift arms to drop. Do not go device. Replace if damaged.
painted parts. Toxic dust and gas under lift arms when raised Never modify equipment or add
can be produced. unless supported by an attachments not approved by
Avoid exhaust fume leaks which approved lift arm support device. Bobcat Company.
can kill without warning. Exhaust Replace it if damaged.
system must be tightly sealed.
WRONG WRONG WRONG
B-6590 B-6580 B-6589

B-16102 B-16102
Stop, cool and clean engine of Keep body, jewelry and clothing Lead-acid batteries produce
flammable materials before away from moving parts, flammable and explosive gases.
checking fluids. electrical contact, hot parts and Keep arcs, sparks, flames and
Never service or adjust loader exhaust. lighted tobacco away from
with the engine running unless Wear eye protection to guard batteries.
instructed to do so in the from battery acid, compressed Batteries contain acid which
manual. springs, fluids under pressure burns eyes or skin on contact.
Avoid contact with leaking and flying debris when engines Wear protective clothing. If acid
hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel are running or tools are used. contacts body, flush well with
under pressure. It can penetrate Use eye protection approved for water. For eye contact flush well
the skin or eyes. type of welding. and get immediate medical
Never fill fuel tank with engine Keep rear door closed except for attention.
running, while smoking or when service. Close and latch door
near open flame. before operating the loader.
Maintenance procedures which are given in the Operation & Maintenance Manual can be performed by the owner/
operator without any specific technical training. Maintenance procedures which are not in the Operation & Maintenance
Manual must be performed ONLY BY QUALIFIED BOBCAT SERVICE PERSONNEL. Always use genuine Bobcat
replacement parts. The Service Safety Training Course is available from your Bobcat dealer.
MSW01-0805
CONTENTS
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
BOBCAT LOADER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii HYDRAULIC
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
MAIN FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1 HYDROSTATIC
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1 SYSTEM
ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
BICS™/BOSS® SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
DRIVE
SYSTEM
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its MAIN
constituents are known to the State of California FRAME
to cause cancer, birth defects and other
reproductive harm.
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
ENGINE
SERVICE
BICS™/BOSS®
SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
553 Loader
i Service Manual
FOREWORD
This manual is for the Bobcat loader mechanic. It provides necessary servicing and adjustment
procedures for the Bobcat loader and its component parts and systems. Refer to the Operation &
Maintenance Manual for operating instructions, starting procedure, daily checks, etc.
A general inspection of the following items must be made after the loader has had service or repair:
1. Check that the ROPS/FOPS 9. Enclosure door latches must

(Including sidescreens) is in open and close freely.
good condition and is not
modified.
2. Check that ROPS mounting 10. Bob–Tach wedges and

hardware is tightened and is linkages must function
Melroe approved. correctly and be in good
condition.
3. The seat belt must be correctly 11. Safety treads must in good
installed, functional and in condition.
good condition.
4. The seat bar and pedal 12. Check for correct function of
interlocks must be correctly indicator lamps (Optional on
adjusted, clean and lubricated. some models).
5. Machine signs must be legible 13. Check hydraulic fluid level,

and in the correct location. engine oil level and fuel supply.
6. Steering levers and foot pedals 14. Inspect for fuel, oil or hydraulic
must return to neutral. fluid leaks.
7. Check for correct funtion of the 15. Lubricate the loader.

work lights.
8. The parking brake must 16. Check the condition of the

function correctly. battery and cables.
553 Loader
iii Service Manual
17. Inspect the air cleaner for
damage or leaks. Check the
condition of the element.
18. Check the electrical charging

system.
19. Check tires for wear and

pressure.
20. Inspect for loose or broken

parts or connections.
21. Operate the loader and check

all functions.
22. Check for any field

modification not completed.
23. Check for correct function of

the Bobcat Interlock Control
System (BICS™) before the
machine is returned to the
customer.
Recommend to the owner that all

necessary corrections be made
before the machine is returned to
service.
553 Loader
iv Service Manual
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read Operation & Maintenance Manual,
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals when making
repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs or service. Failure
to follow instructions can cause injury or death.
W–2003–1289
The following publications provide information on the safe use and maintenance of the loader and attachments:
• The Delivery Report is used to assure that complete instructions have been given to the new owner and that the machine
is in safe operating condition.
• The Operation & Maintenance Manual delivered with the loader gives operating information as well as routine
maintenance and service procedures. It is a part of the loader and must stay with the machine when it is sold. Replacement
Operation & Maintenance Manuals can be ordered from your Bobcat loader dealer.
• The loader has machine signs (decals) which instruct on the safe operation and care. The signs and their locations are
shown in the Operation & Maintenance Manual. Replacement signs are available from your Bobcat loader dealer.
• The loader has a plastic Operator’s Handbook fastened to the operator cab. Its brief instructions are convenient to the
operator. The handbook is available from your dealer in English edition or a combination English, French, German, Italian,
Dutch & Spanish edition.
• The EMI Safety Manual (available in Spanish) delivered with the loader gives general safety information.
• The Service Manual and Parts Manual are available from your dealer for use by mechanics to do shop–type service and
repair work.
• The Skid–Steer Loader Operator Training Course is available through your local dealer. This course is intended to provide
rules and practices for correct operation of the Bobcat loader. The course is available in English and Spanish versions.
Warnings on the machine and in the This notice identifies procedures

manuals are for your safety. Failure to which must be followed to avoid
obey warnings can cause injury or damage to the machine.
death. I–2019–0284
W–2044–1285
Safety Alert Symbol: This Safety Symbol is used for important safety messages. When you see this
symbol follow the safety message to avoid personal injury or death.
553 Loader
v Service Manual
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (Cont’d)
• Wear tight fitting clothing. Always wear safety glasses when maintaining or servicing the loader. Safety glasses, hearing
protection or loader special application kits are required for some work. See your dealer for Melroe Safety equipment.
• Know where fire extinguishers and first aid kits are located and how to use them.
• Do not use the Bobcat loader where exhaust, arcs, sparks or hot components can contact flammable material, explosive
dust or gases.
• The engine compartment and engine cooling system must be inspected every day and cleaned if necessary to prevent
a fire hazard and overheating.
• Check all electrical wiring and connections for damage. Keep the battery terminals clean and tight. Repair or replace any
damaged part.
• Check fuel and hydraulic tubes, hoses and fittings for damage and leakage. Never use open flame or bare skin to check
for leaks. Tighten or replace any parts that show leakage. Always clean fluid spills. Do not use gasoline or diesel fuel for
cleaning parts. Use commercial nonflammable solvents.
• Follow any environmental safety regulations when disposing of used fluids such as engine oil, grease or anti–freeze.
• Do not use ether or starting fluids on this engine. It has glow plugs. These starting aids can cause an explosion and injure
you or bystanders.
• Always clean the loader and disconnect the battery before doing any welding. Cover rubber hoses, battery and all other
flammable parts. Keep a fire extinguisher near the loader when welding. Have good ventilation when grinding or welding
painted parts. Wear a dust mask when grinding painted parts. Toxic dust or gas can be produced.
• Stop the engine and let it cool before adding fuel. No smoking!
• Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance or Service Manuals for connecting the battery.
• Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance or Service Manuals for cleaning the spark arrestor muffler.
A fire extinguisher is available from your local dealer. The fire extinguisher can be installed in the location shown [A].
P–3705
553 Loader
vi Service Manual
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS
Always use the serial number of the loader when

A
requesting service information or when ordering parts.
Early or later models (identification made by serial
number) may use different parts, or it may be necessary
to use a different procedure in doing a specific service
operation.
LOADER SERIAL NUMBER
The loader serial number plate is located on the inside of

the left upright, above the rear grill [A].
Explanation of loader Serial Number:

P–1670
XXXX XXXXX
Production Sequence (Series)

B
Model, Engine Version
1
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The serial number (Item 1) [B] is located at the fuel
injection pump side on the engine block.
P–1671
DELIVERY REPORT C
The Delivery Report must be filled out by the dealer and
signed by the owner or operator when the Bobcat loader
is delivered. An explanation of the form must be given to
the owner. Make sure it is filled out completely [C].
553 Loader
vii Service Manual
553 BOBCAT LOADER IDENTIFICATION
SEAT BAR
UPRIGHTS
OPERATOR CAB
(ROPS & FOPS)
GRILL
LIFT ARM
LIFT
CYLINDER
REAR LIGHTS
REAR DOOR
TIRES*
FRONT LIGHTS
GRAB
HANDLES OPERATOR
SEAT
STEERING
LEVER
SEAT BELT
TILT CYLINDER
QUICK COUPLERS
SAFETY TREAD
BUCKET BUCKET STEPS B–14241

B–14239
* TIRES – The 553 Bobcat loader is base–equipped with flotation tires as shown.
BUCKET – Several different buckets and other attachments are available for the Bobcat loader.
ROPS, FOPS – Roll Over Protective Structure, per SAE J1040 and ISO 3471 and Falling Object Protective
Structure per SAE J1043 and ISO 3449 Level I. Level ll FOPS is available for protection from heavy falling
objects. The Bobcat loader is base–equipped with a standard operator cab as shown. An extra insulated cab
is available as an option (Reduced noise level).
553 Loader
viii Service Manual
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
All 553 Bobcat loaders are equipped with the following standard items:
Bob–Tach Seat Bar
Spark Arrestor Muffler Parking Brake
Lift Arm Support Device Gauges/Warning Lights
Operator Cab (W/ROPS & FOPS Approval) Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS™)
Seat Belt
Below is a listing of the optional equipment which is available through your Bobcat loader dealer.
553
Tires
27 x 8:50–15, 4PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Std.
27 x 8:50–15, 6 PR Heavy Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt.
Operator Cab
Sound Cab (85 dBa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. (Std. in Europe)
Deluxe Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt.
Suspension Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Operating Lights (Front & Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Back–Up Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Heated Enclosed Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Top Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Cab Enclosure Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Vinyl Cab Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Cover Kit (Pedals Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Cover Kit (Hydraulic Reservoir Area) . . . . . . . . . FA
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Flasher Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Strobe or Rotating Beacon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
3’’ Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Special Applications Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Turn Signal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
FOPS Level II Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Hydraulics
Front Auxiliary Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA (Std. in Europe)
Hydraulic Bucket Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Bucket Positioning On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Other
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Single Point Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Locking Fuel Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Radiator Screen Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Low Coolant Sensor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Rental Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Std. = Standard Equipment
Opt. = Factory Installed Option
FA = Field Accessory
NA = Not Available
Specifications subject to
change without notice
553 Loader
ix Service Manual
CONTENTS
PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
BOBCAT LOADER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii HYDRAULIC
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
DRIVE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
MAIN FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1 HYDROSTATIC
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1 SYSTEM
ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
BICS™/BOSS® SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
DRIVE
SYSTEM
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its MAIN
constituents are known to the State of California FRAME
to cause cancer, birth defects and other
reproductive harm.
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
ENGINE
SERVICE
BICS™/BOSS®
SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
553 Loader
i Service Manual
FOREWORD
This manual is for the Bobcat loader mechanic. It provides necessary servicing and adjustment
procedures for the Bobcat loader and its component parts and systems. Refer to the Operation &
Maintenance Manual for operating instructions, starting procedure, daily checks, etc.
A general inspection of the following items must be made after the loader has had service or repair:
1. Check that the ROPS/FOPS 9. Enclosure door latches must

(Including sidescreens) is in open and close freely.
good condition and is not
modified.
2. Check that ROPS mounting 10. Bob–Tach wedges and

hardware is tightened and is linkages must function
Melroe approved. correctly and be in good
condition.
3. The seat belt must be correctly 11. Safety treads must in good
installed, functional and in condition.
good condition.
4. The seat bar and pedal 12. Check for correct function of
interlocks must be correctly indicator lamps (Optional on
adjusted, clean and lubricated. some models).
5. Machine signs must be legible 13. Check hydraulic fluid level,

and in the correct location. engine oil level and fuel supply.
6. Steering levers and foot pedals 14. Inspect for fuel, oil or hydraulic
must return to neutral. fluid leaks.
7. Check for correct funtion of the 15. Lubricate the loader.

work lights.
8. The parking brake must 16. Check the condition of the

function correctly. battery and cables.
553 Loader
iii Service Manual
17. Inspect the air cleaner for
damage or leaks. Check the
condition of the element.
18. Check the electrical charging

system.
19. Check tires for wear and

pressure.
20. Inspect for loose or broken

parts or connections.
21. Operate the loader and check

all functions.
22. Check for any field

modification not completed.
23. Check for correct function of

the Bobcat Interlock Control
System (BICS™) before the
machine is returned to the
customer.
Recommend to the owner that all

necessary corrections be made
before the machine is returned to
service.
553 Loader
iv Service Manual
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read Operation & Maintenance Manual,
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals when making
repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function after adjustments, repairs or service. Failure
to follow instructions can cause injury or death.
W–2003–1289
The following publications provide information on the safe use and maintenance of the loader and attachments:
• The Delivery Report is used to assure that complete instructions have been given to the new owner and that the machine
is in safe operating condition.
• The Operation & Maintenance Manual delivered with the loader gives operating information as well as routine
maintenance and service procedures. It is a part of the loader and must stay with the machine when it is sold. Replacement
Operation & Maintenance Manuals can be ordered from your Bobcat loader dealer.
• The loader has machine signs (decals) which instruct on the safe operation and care. The signs and their locations are
shown in the Operation & Maintenance Manual. Replacement signs are available from your Bobcat loader dealer.
• The loader has a plastic Operator’s Handbook fastened to the operator cab. Its brief instructions are convenient to the
operator. The handbook is available from your dealer in English edition or a combination English, French, German, Italian,
Dutch & Spanish edition.
• The EMI Safety Manual (available in Spanish) delivered with the loader gives general safety information.
• The Service Manual and Parts Manual are available from your dealer for use by mechanics to do shop–type service and
repair work.
• The Skid–Steer Loader Operator Training Course is available through your local dealer. This course is intended to provide
rules and practices for correct operation of the Bobcat loader. The course is available in English and Spanish versions.
Warnings on the machine and in the This notice identifies procedures

manuals are for your safety. Failure to which must be followed to avoid
obey warnings can cause injury or damage to the machine.
death. I–2019–0284
W–2044–1285
Safety Alert Symbol: This Safety Symbol is used for important safety messages. When you see this
symbol follow the safety message to avoid personal injury or death.
553 Loader
v Service Manual
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (Cont’d)
• Wear tight fitting clothing. Always wear safety glasses when maintaining or servicing the loader. Safety glasses, hearing
protection or loader special application kits are required for some work. See your dealer for Melroe Safety equipment.
• Know where fire extinguishers and first aid kits are located and how to use them.
• Do not use the Bobcat loader where exhaust, arcs, sparks or hot components can contact flammable material, explosive
dust or gases.
• The engine compartment and engine cooling system must be inspected every day and cleaned if necessary to prevent
a fire hazard and overheating.
• Check all electrical wiring and connections for damage. Keep the battery terminals clean and tight. Repair or replace any
damaged part.
• Check fuel and hydraulic tubes, hoses and fittings for damage and leakage. Never use open flame or bare skin to check
for leaks. Tighten or replace any parts that show leakage. Always clean fluid spills. Do not use gasoline or diesel fuel for
cleaning parts. Use commercial nonflammable solvents.
• Follow any environmental safety regulations when disposing of used fluids such as engine oil, grease or anti–freeze.
• Do not use ether or starting fluids on this engine. It has glow plugs. These starting aids can cause an explosion and injure
you or bystanders.
• Always clean the loader and disconnect the battery before doing any welding. Cover rubber hoses, battery and all other
flammable parts. Keep a fire extinguisher near the loader when welding. Have good ventilation when grinding or welding
painted parts. Wear a dust mask when grinding painted parts. Toxic dust or gas can be produced.
• Stop the engine and let it cool before adding fuel. No smoking!
• Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance or Service Manuals for connecting the battery.
• Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance or Service Manuals for cleaning the spark arrestor muffler.
A fire extinguisher is available from your local dealer. The fire extinguisher can be installed in the location shown [A].
P–3705
553 Loader
vi Service Manual
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS
Always use the serial number of the loader when

A
requesting service information or when ordering parts.
Early or later models (identification made by serial
number) may use different parts, or it may be necessary
to use a different procedure in doing a specific service
operation.
LOADER SERIAL NUMBER
The loader serial number plate is located on the inside of

the left upright, above the rear grill [A].
Explanation of loader Serial Number:

P–1670
XXXX XXXXX
Production Sequence (Series)

B
Model, Engine Version
1
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The serial number (Item 1) [B] is located at the fuel
injection pump side on the engine block.
P–1671
DELIVERY REPORT C
The Delivery Report must be filled out by the dealer and
signed by the owner or operator when the Bobcat loader
is delivered. An explanation of the form must be given to
the owner. Make sure it is filled out completely [C].
553 Loader
vii Service Manual
553 BOBCAT LOADER IDENTIFICATION
SEAT BAR
UPRIGHTS
OPERATOR CAB
(ROPS & FOPS)
GRILL
LIFT ARM
LIFT
CYLINDER
REAR LIGHTS
REAR DOOR
TIRES*
FRONT LIGHTS
GRAB
HANDLES OPERATOR
SEAT
STEERING
LEVER
SEAT BELT
TILT CYLINDER
QUICK COUPLERS
SAFETY TREAD
BUCKET BUCKET STEPS B–14241

B–14239
* TIRES – The 553 Bobcat loader is base–equipped with flotation tires as shown.
BUCKET – Several different buckets and other attachments are available for the Bobcat loader.
ROPS, FOPS – Roll Over Protective Structure, per SAE J1040 and ISO 3471 and Falling Object Protective
Structure per SAE J1043 and ISO 3449 Level I. Level ll FOPS is available for protection from heavy falling
objects. The Bobcat loader is base–equipped with a standard operator cab as shown. An extra insulated cab
is available as an option (Reduced noise level).
553 Loader
viii Service Manual
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
All 553 Bobcat loaders are equipped with the following standard items:
Bob–Tach Seat Bar
Spark Arrestor Muffler Parking Brake
Lift Arm Support Device Gauges/Warning Lights
Operator Cab (W/ROPS & FOPS Approval) Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS™)
Seat Belt
Below is a listing of the optional equipment which is available through your Bobcat loader dealer.
553
Tires
27 x 8:50–15, 4PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Std.
27 x 8:50–15, 6 PR Heavy Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt.
Operator Cab
Sound Cab (85 dBa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. (Std. in Europe)
Deluxe Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt.
Suspension Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Operating Lights (Front & Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Back–Up Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Heated Enclosed Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Top Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Cab Enclosure Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Vinyl Cab Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Cover Kit (Pedals Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Cover Kit (Hydraulic Reservoir Area) . . . . . . . . . FA
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Flasher Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Strobe or Rotating Beacon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
3’’ Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Special Applications Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Turn Signal Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
FOPS Level II Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Hydraulics
Front Auxiliary Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA (Std. in Europe)
Hydraulic Bucket Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opt. & FA
Bucket Positioning On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Other
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Single Point Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Locking Fuel Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Radiator Screen Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA (Std. in Europe)
Low Coolant Sensor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Rental Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FA
Std. = Standard Equipment
Opt. = Factory Installed Option
FA = Field Accessory
NA = Not Available
Specifications subject to
change without notice
553 Loader
ix Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE
Page MAINTENANCE
Number
AIR CLEANER SERVICE
Replacing Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
ALTERNATOR BELT
Adjusting the Alternator Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Cleaning the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Checking the Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Removing Coolant From the Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Checking Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
Replacing Oil and Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
FINAL DRIVE TRANSMISSION (CHAINCASE)
Checking and Adding Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
Removing Oil From the Chaincase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
FUEL SYSTEM
Filling the Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Removing Air From the Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
Checking and Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
Replacing Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
Replacing Hydraulic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE
Installing and Removing Lift Arm Support Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE LOADER
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
LIFTING THE LOADER
Single Point Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
LUBRICATION OF THE LOADER
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
OPERATOR CAB
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Lowering the Operator Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
Raising the Operator Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
REMOTE START SWITCH
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
SEAT BAR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Seat Bar Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Seat Bar Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
553 Loader
–1–1– Service Manual
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Cont’d)
Page
Number
SPARK ARRESTOR MUFFLER
Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
TIRE MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
TOWING THE LOADER

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
TRANSPORTING THE LOADER
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
USING A BOOSTER BATTERY (JUMP STARTING)

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
553 Loader
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Maintenance work must be done at regular intervals. Failure to do so will result in excessive wear and early failures. The
service schedule is a guide for correct maintenance of the Bobcat loader.
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine.

Read Operation Maintenance Manual, Handbook and signs (decals)
on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manual when
making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function
after adjustments, repairs or service. Failure to follow instructions
can cause injury or death.
W–2003–1289
SERVICE SCHEDULE HOURS
ITEM SERVICE REQUIRED 8–10 50 100 250 1000

Engine Oil Check the oil level and add oil as needed.
Engine Air Cleaner Replace the outer filter element only when the red ring shows in the
indicator window. Check for leaks and damaged components.
Engine Cooling System Clean debris from oil cooler, radiator & grill. Check coolant level in
recovery tank and add as needed.
Tires Check for damaged tires and correct air pressure.
Seat Belt, Seat Bar Check the condition of seat belt. Check the seat bar & pedal interlocks
for correct operation. Clean dirt and debris from moving parts.
Safety Signs and Safety Check for damaged signs (decals) and safety treads. Replace any
Tread signs or safety treads that are damaged or worn.
Indicator & Lights (Opt.) Check for correct operation of all indicators & lights.
Operator Cab Check the fastening bolts, washers & nuts. Check the condition of cab.
Lift Arms, Cyl., Bob–Tach Lubricate with multi–purpose lithium based grease.
Pivot Pins and Wedges
Engine Fuel Filter Remove the trapped water.
Bobcat Interlock Control Check BICS System Controller functions. Clean dirt, debris or objects
System (BICS™) from under or behind seat as required.
Battery Check cables & electrolyte level.
Hyd. Fluid, Hoses & Check fluid level & add as needed. Check for damage & leaks.
Tubelines Repair & replace as needed.
Control Pedals & Steering Check for correct operation. Repair or adjust as needed.
Wheel Nuts Check for loose wheel nuts & tighten to 105–115 ft.–lbs. (142–156 Nm)
torque.
Parking Brake Check operations & adjust as needed.
Alternator Belt Check tension & adjust as needed.
Final Drive Trans. Check fluid level and add as needed.
(Chaincase)
Engine Oil & Filter Replace oil & filter.
Spark Arrestor Muffler Clean the spark chamber.
Steering Lever Pivots Grease two fittings. Add oil to steering shaft.
U–Joint Grease three (3) fittings with correct grease.
Fuel Filter Replace filter element.
Hyd./Hydro. Reservoir Replace the reservoir breather cap and hydraulic/hydrostatic filter.
& Filter
Chaincase Replace the fluid.
Hyd. Reservoir Replace the fluid and filter.
Bobcat Interlock Control Check lift arm bypass control.
System (BICS™)
Check wheel nut torque every 8 hours for the first 24 hours.
Also replace hydraulic/hydrostatic filter element when the transmission warning light stays on for five minutes
after the fluid is at operating temperature.
Or every 12 months.
553 Loader
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
A
Instructions are necessary before operating or

servicing machine. Read Operation &
Maintenance Manuals, Handbook and signs
(decals) on machine. Follow warnings and
instructions in the manuals when making
repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for
correct function after adjustments, repairs or
service. Failure to follow instructions can
cause injury or death [A].
W–2003–1289
LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE LOADER B–7023
Procedure
Always park the loader on a level surface.
Put jackstands under the front axles and rear

corners of the frame before running the engine
for service. Failure to use jackstands can allow
the machine to fall or move and cause injury or
death.
W–2017–0286
B
Put a floor jack under the rear of the loader [B].

Lift the rear of the loader and install jackstands [B].
P–5824
Put the floor jack under the front of the loader [C].
Lift the front of the loader and put jackstands under the
C
loader frame.
NOTE: Make sure the jackstands do not touch the
tires.
P–5821
553 Loader
TRANSPORTING THE LOADER
Procedure
A
Adequately designed ramps of sufficient

strength are needed to support the weight of
the machine when loading onto a transport
vehicle. Wood ramps can break and cause
personal injury.
W–2058–0494
B–2668
A loader with an empty bucket or no attachment must be

loaded backward onto the transport vehicle [A].
B
Use the following procedure to fasten the Bobcat loader
to the transport vehicle to prevent the loader from moving
during sudden stops or when going up or down slopes [B].
Lower the bucket or attachment to the floor. Stop the
engine. Engage the parking brake. Install chains at the
front and rear loader as shown [B].
NOTE: Rear of the loader can be chained using the
upright slots or using the loop below the rear
door [B].
C–2563 C–7384
B–7383
P–4031
553 Loader
LIFTING THE LOADER
Single Point Lift
A
1
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

• Before lifting, check fasteners on single
point lift and operator cab.
• Assemble front cab fasteners as shown in
manual.
• Never allow riders in the cab or bystanders
within 15 feet (5 meters) while lifting the
machine.
W–2007–1285
The loader can be lifted with the single point lift which is
available as a kit from your Bobcat loader dealer.
Fasten the pins (Item 1) in the kit as shown in figure [A].
1
The single point lift, supplied by Melroe Company is
designed to safely lift and support the Bobcat loader.
TOWING THE LOADER
Procedure
B–7489
Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or

pulling. Hydrostatic pumps and motors will be
damaged. I–2001–1285
Do not push or pull the machine at more than

To prevent damage to the loader hydrostatic system, the 2 MPH (3,2 km/h) or for a distance of more than
loader must be towed only a short distance at slow speed.
(Example: Moving the loader onto a transport vehicle). 25 feet (7,6 meters) with the towing tool in
place. I–2017–0389
The towing chain (or cable) must be rated at 1–1/2 times
the weight of the loader. (See Specifications, Page 9–1.)
• Turn the key switch to ON and press the Traction
Lock Override button. Towing tool (MEL1220) must be
installed in the hydrostatic pump. (Available from your
Bobcat dealer.)
• Tow the Bobcat at 2 MPH (3,2 km/hr.) or less for not
more than 25 feet (7,6 meters).
If the electrical system is not functioning, the brake
system must be disassembled to move the loader. Refer
to the Traction Lock Removal and Installation procedure
(Page 8–1).
STOPPING THE BOBCAT LOADER
When the steering levers are moved to the neutral
position, the hydrostatic transmission will act as a service
brake and stop the loader.
553 Loader
LIFT ARM SUPPORT DEVICE
Installing and Removing Lift Arm Support Device
A 1
Never work on a machine with the lift arms up

unless the lift arms are secured by a lift arm
support device. Failure to use an approved lift
arm support device can allow the lift arms or
attachment to fall and cause injury or death.
W–2059–0991
P–4008
Put jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.

Open the rear door of the loader and remove the lift arm
support device (Item 1) [A].
Both sets of fasteners at the front of the

operator cab (ROPS) must be assembled as
One person must be in the operator’s seat, with the seat shown in this Operation & Maintenance
belt fastened and seat bar lowered, until the lift arm Manual. Failure to secure ROPS correctly can
support device is installed [B]. cause injury or death.
W–2005–1089
Start the engine and raise the lift arms all the way up.
Have a second person install the lift arm support device
over the rod of one of the lift cylinders [B]. The lift arm
support device must be tight against the cylinder rod.
The 90° notch should be installed against the outer case
of the lift cylinder (See Inset). B
Lower the lift arms until the support device is held
between the lift arm and the lift cylinder.
Repeat the procedure used above to remove the lift arm
support device from the loader. MC–2201
OPERATOR CAB
Description
The Bobcat loader has an operator cab (ROPS and
FOPS) as standard equipment to protect the operator
from rollover and falling objects. Check with your dealer P–4040
if the operator cab has been damaged.
Never modify operator cab by welding,

grinding, drilling holes or adding attachments
unless instructed to do so by Melroe
Company. Changes to the cab can cause loss
of operator protection from rollover and falling
objects, and result in injury or death.
W–2069–1285
553 Loader
OPERATOR CAB (Cont’d)
Emergency Exit
A
The front opening on the operator cab and rear window
provide exits.
To exit through the rear window, use the following
procedure:
Pull on the tag on the top of the rear window to remove the
rubber cord [A].
Push the rear window out of the rear of the operator cab.
P–0660
Exit through the rear of the operator cab [B].
ROPS/FOPS – Roll–Over Protection Structure per SAE
J1040 and ISO 3471 and Falling Object Protective
B
Structure per SAE J1043 and ISO 3449 Level I. Level II
is available.
Level I – Protection from falling bricks, small concrete
blocks, and hand tools encountered in operations such as
highway maintenance, landscaping, and other
construction site services.
Level II – Protection from falling tree, rocks; for machines
involved in site clearing, overhead demolition or forestry.
Raising the Operator Cab
Stop the loader on a level surface. Lower the lift arms. If P–7281
the lift arms must be up while raising the operator cab,
install the lift arm support device (Page 1–6).
C
Before the cab or the lift arms are raised for

service, jackstands must be put under the rear
corners of the frame. Failure to use jackstands
may allow the machine to tip backward
causing injury or death.
W–2014–1285
Remove the nut and plate (both sides) (Inset [C]).

P–1518 P–4032
Lift on the grab handle and bottom of the operator cab
slowly until the cab latching mechanism engages and the
cab is all the way up [C]. D
Lowering the Operator Cab
Pull down on the bottom of the operator cab until it stops
at the latching mechanism. Release the latching
mechanism and pull the cab all the way down [D].
Install the plate and nut (Inset [C]).
Tighten the nuts to 40–50 ft.–lbs. (54–68 Nm) torque
(Inset [C]).
P–7251
553 Loader
SEAT BAR RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Description
A
The seat bar restraint system has a pivoting seat bar with
arm rests and has spring loaded interlocks for the lift and
tilt control pedals. The operator controls the use of the
seat bar. The seat bar in the down position helps to keep
the operator in the seat. The interlocks require the
operator to lower the seat bar in order to operate the foot
pedal controls. When the seat bar is up, the lift and tilt
pedals are locked when returned to the neutral position.
P–3269 P–3270
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH B

The seat bar system must lock the lift and tilt
control pedals in neutral when the seat bar is
up. Service the system if pedals do not lock Clean
correctly.
W–2105–1285
Seat Bar Inspection

Sit in the seat and fasten the seat belt. Engage the
parking brake. Pull the seat bar all the way down. Start the
engine.
Operate each foot pedal to check both the lift and tilt
functions. P–4002
Raise the lift arms until the bucket is about 2 feet (600
mm) off the ground. Raise the seat bar, try to move each
pedal. The pedals must be firmly locked in neutral
position. There must be no motion of the tilt (bucket) or the
lift arms when the pedals are pushed.
Pull the seat bar down, lower the lift arms. Operate the lift
pedals. While the lift arms are going up, raise the seat bar
and the lift arms should stop.
Lower the seat bar, lower the lift arms and place the
bucket flat on the ground. Stop the engine. Raise the seat
bar and operate the foot pedals to be sure that the pedals
are firmly locked in the neutral position. Unbuckle the seat
belt.
Seat Bar Maintenance

See the Service Schedule Page 1–3 and on the loader for
correct service interval.
Clean any debris or dirt from the moving parts [A] & [B].
Inspect the linkage bolts and nuts for tightness. The
correct torque is 25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm).
If the seat bar system does not function correctly, check
for free movement of each linkage part. Check for
excessive wear. Adjust pedal control linkage. Replace
parts that are worn or damaged. Use only genuine Melroe
replacement parts.
553 Loader
AIR CLEANER SERVICE
Replacing Filter Element
A
See the Service Schedule Page 1–3 for the interval to
service the air cleaner system.
Check the air intake hose for damage. Check the air
cleaner housing for damage. Check to make sure all P–1688
1
connections are tight.
Replace the large (outer) filter element only when the red
ring shows in the window of the condition indicator (Item
1) [A].
NOTE: Push the button on the condition indicator

P–4009
(See Inset) and start the engine. If the red ring
does not show, do not replace the filter
element [A].
Service the air cleaner as follows:
B
Loosen the clamp (Item 1) [B] and remove the dust cover
(Item 2) [B].
1
P–4012
Remove the dust cup from the cover [C].

C
P–4014
Remove the wing nut from the large air filter element [D].
D
P–4011
553 Loader
AIR CLEANER SERVICE (Cont’d)
Replacing Filter Element (Cont’d)
A
Remove the large air filter element [A].
NOTE: Make sure all sealing surfaces are free of dirt
and debris.
Install the new filter element and tighten the wing nut.
Install the dust cover and tighten the wing nut.
Only replace the inner filter element under the following
conditions:
Replace the inner filter element every third time the
outer filter is replaced. P–4010
Replace the inner filter element when the red ring still
shows in the condition indicator window after the outer
filter is replaced. B
Remove the wing nut (Item 1) [B] and the inner filter
element.
1
P–4013
Record the operating hours of the loader on the decal

(Item 1) [C] inside the rear door. C
P–4007
553 Loader
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Specifications A
Use only clean, high quality diesel fuel, Grade No. 1 or
Grade No. 2.
The following is one suggested blending guideline which
should prevent fuel gelling problems:
Temp. F°/C° No. 2 No. 1
+15o(–9o) o 100% 0%
Down to –20 /–29o 50% 50%
Below –20o/–29o 0% 100%
We recommend an operator contact their fuel supplier for
local recommendations.
Filling the Fuel Tank
P–4027
B WRONG
Stop and cool the engine before adding fuel.

NO SMOKING! Failure to obey warnings can
cause an explosion or fire. W–2063–0887
Remove the fuel fill cap [A].

Use a clean, approved safety container to add fuel of the
correct specifications. Add fuel only in an area that has
free movement of air and no open flames or sparks. NO
SMOKING [B]!
Install and tighten the fuel fill cap [A].
Fuel Filter B–6586
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat,

flames, sparks or lighted tobacco away from
fuel and oil. Failure to use care around
combustibles can cause explosion or fire
which can result in injury or death.
W–2103–1285
See the Service Schedule Page 1–3 for the service

interval when to remove the water from the fuel filter.
Turn the fuel shut–off valve clockwise to shut–off the fuel
supply [C]. P–7023
Loosen the drain at the bottom of the filter element (See
Inset) [D] to drain the water from the filter.
Open the shut–off valve [C]. D
See the Service Schedule Page 1–3 for the service 1
interval when to replace the fuel filter.
Clean the area around the fuel filter. Close the shut–off
valve [C].
Use a wrench to loosen the fuel filter bolt (Item 2) [D].
Remove the water trap and fuel filter (Item 1) [D]. 2 P–7041
Replace the seals as needed.
Install the new filter element and water trap.
Tighten the fuel filter bolt.
Open the shut–off valve [C]. P–7042
553 Loader
FUEL SYSTEM (Cont’d)
Removing Air From the Fuel System
A
After replacing the fuel filter element or when the fuel tank
has run out of fuel, the air must be removed from the fuel
system before starting the engine.
Open the rear door. The engine must be cool.
Open the vent plug (Item 1) [A].
Operate the hand pump (Item 1) [B] until fuel flows from P–7042
the vent plug with no air bubbles.
Tighten the vent plug. B 1
Operate the hand pump until it feels solid [B].
Move the engine speed control to minimum RPM. Open

the valve (Item 1) [C] and squeeze the hand pump several
times. P–7046
Start the engine. When the engine runs smoothly, close

the valve (Item 1) [C].
C

fuel and oil. Failure to use care around 1
W–2103–1285
P–7057
553 Loader
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Checking Engine Oil
A
Check the oil level every day.
Stop the engine and remove the dipstick [A].
Keep the oil level between the marks on the dipstick.
Use a good quality motor oil that meets API Service
Classification of CD or better (See Oil Chart).
Replacing Oil and Filter
interval for replacing the engine oil and filter. P–1685
Use the following procedure to replace the oil and filter:

Run the engine until it is at operating temperature. Stop
B
the engine.
Open the rear door and remove the cap from the end of
the hose and drain the oil into a container [B].
Remove the filter (Item 1) [C].
Clean the filter housing surface. Put clean oil on the
gasket of the new filter install the filter and hand tighten.
Remove the oil filler cap [D].
Use a good quality motor oil that meets API Service
Classification of CD or better (See Oil Chart). P–1686
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

(LUBRICATION OILS FOR ENGINE CRANKCASE)
C°–34 –29 –23 –18 –13 –7 –1 +4 +10 +15 +21 +27 +32 +38 +43 +49 +54 +60
C
SAE 40 or 20W–50
SAE 10W–30
SAE 15W–40
1
SAE 5W–30
SAE 30W
SAE 20W–20
SAE 10W
P–4017
⎧°–30 –20 –10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40 +50 +60 +70 +80 +90 +100 +110 +120 +130 +140
TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED BEFORE

NEXT OIL CHANGE D
(DIESEL: USE API CLASSIFICATION CD or BETTER)
Fill to capacity (See Specification Section, Page 9–1).

Start the engine and let it run for about 5 minutes. Check
for leaks at the filter. Check the oil level. Add oil until the
level is at the FULL mark on the dipstick. Install the oil filler
cap [D].
NOTE: DO NOT overfill the crankcase.
P–1689
553 Loader
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM (Cont’d)
Replacing Oil and Filter (Cont’d)
A
Record the operating hours of the loader on the decal
(Item 1) [A] inside the rear door.
1
P–4007
553 Loader
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Check the cooling system every day to prevent
A
overheating, loss of performance or engine damage.
Checking the Coolant Level
Open the rear door.
The coolant recovery tank (Item 1) [A] must be at the
FULL COLD mark when engine is cool.
The loader is factory filled with propylene glycol mixture.
DO NOT mix propylene glycol with ethylene glycol.
NOTE: The loader is factory filled with propylene

P–4016
glycol coolant. DO NOT mix propylene glycol
with ethylene glycol.
Propylene Glycol B
Add premixed coolant; 47% water and 53% propylene
glycol to the recovery tank if the coolant level is low.
One gallon and one pint of propylene glycol mixed with
one gallon of water is the correct mixture of coolant to
provide a –34°F (–37°C) freeze protection.
Use a refractometer to check the condition of propylene
glycol in your cooling system.
P–1677
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when C

any of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W–2019–1285
Cleaning the Cooling System

Open the rear door.
Remove the access panels at the blower housing [B].
P–4019
Remove the rear grill. (See Page 5–1.)
Use air pressure or water pressure to remove the debris
in the area of the radiator and oil cooler [C].
D
If debris is a problem, check with your dealer about the
special debris screens.
Removing Coolant From the Cooling System
Remove the rear grill. (See Page 5–1.) Remove the
radiator cap [D].
P–1678
553 Loader
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (Cont’d)
Removing Coolant From the Cooling System
A
(Cont’d)
Connect a hose to the coolant drain valve (Item 1) [A] or
use a funnel to keep coolant from getting into the engine
compartment. Open the valve and drain coolant into a
container.
When all the coolant is removed close the valve. 1
Fill the radiator with premixed coolant and install the
radiator cap.
P–1697
Fill the coolant recovery tank 1/3 full with premixed

coolant [B].
B
Check the radiator cap for correct pressure rating or
overheating can result.
Check for leaks in the cooling system. Check for worn or
damaged hoses, clamps or radiator. Check for loose or
worn water pump belt.
Replace damaged parts immediately to prevent leaks and
overheating
Install the rear grill.
P–4016
553 Loader
ALTERNATOR BELT
Adjusting the Alternator Belt
A
Stop the engine.
Remove the engine belt shield. (See Page 6–1.)
2
Loosen the mounting bolt (Item 1) [A] and adjustment bolt
(Item 2) [A].
P–1701
Move the alternator until the belt has 1/4 inch (6,4 mm)
movement [B] at the middle of the belt span with 5 lbs. (22
B
N) or force.
Tighten the adjustment bolt and mounting bolt.
Reinstall the alternator belt shield. (See Page 6–1.)
P–7094
553 Loader
USING A BOOSTER BATTERY (Jump Starting)
Procedure
A
If it is necessary to use a booster battery to start the
engine, BE CAREFUL! There must be one person in the
operator’s seat and one person to connect and
disconnect the battery cables.
The ignition must be in the OFF position. The booster
battery to be used must be 12 volt.
P–1700
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and

skin on contact. Wear goggles, protective
clothing and rubber gloves to keep acid off
body.
In case of acid contact, wash immediately with
water for several minutes and get medical
attention in case of eye contact.
W–2065–1286 Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
disconnected.
• Battery cables are connected when using a
fast charger or when welding on the loader
(Remove both cables from the battery).
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
connected wrong.
I–2023–1285
Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco
away from batteries. When ‘‘jumping’’ from
booster battery make final connection
(negative) at engine frame.
Do not jump start or charge a frozen battery.
Warm battery to 60°F. (16°C.) before connecting
to a charger. Unplug charger before connecting
or disconnecting cables to battery.
Battery gas can explode and cause serious
injury.
W–2066–0490
Connect the end of the first cable to the positive terminal

(+) of the booster battery. Connect the other end of the
same cable to the loader battery positive (+) terminal [A].
Connect the end of the second cable to the negative
terminal (–) of the booster battery. Connect the other end
of second cable to the engine [A].
Keep the cables away from moving parts.
Start the engine.
After the engine has started, remove the ground cable
connected to the engine first.
Remove the cable connected to the loader battery.
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
The hydraulic and hydrostatic systems use the same
A
1
hydraulic fluid reservoir.
The system has an engine driven gear pump that supplies
fluid to the control valve, lift and tilt cylinders.
Fluid also goes from the control valve to the hydrostatic
transmission pumps to provide charge pressure and
cooling.
A 10 micron filter element is installed on the left side of the
engine compartment. This filter is used to clean the fluid
for the hydrostatic transmission.
The location of the oil cooler is above the engine. The oil P–0163
cooler is used for cooling the hydraulic fluid before it
returns to the hydrostatic pump.
Checking and Adding Fluid
B
Use only recommended fluid in the hydraulic/hydrostatic
system. (See Specifications, on Page 9–1 for the correct
fluid.) Put the loader on a level surface. Lower the lift arms
and put the attachment flat on the ground. Stop the
engine.
Hydraulic fluid must show in the sight glass (Item 1) [A].
If the fluid is not seen in the sight glass, remove the filler
cap from the reservoir [B].
P–4036
Add fluid to the reservoir until it shows in the sight glass

[C]. C
Replace the filler cap.
P–4037
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM (Cont’d)
Replacing Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Filter
A
See the Service Schedule Page 1–3 for the correct
service interval.
Stop the engine. Open the rear door.
1
Clean the area around the filter housing.
Remove the filter element (Item 1) [A].
Clean the surface of the filter housing head where the
filter element seal contacts the filter housing.
Lubricate the rubber gasket with grease. P–1684
Install the filter element and hand tighten.

Operate the loader and check for leaks at the filter.
B
Check fluid level in the reservoir and add as needed.
Replacing the Hydraulic Fluid
interval to replace the fluid. The fluid must also be
replaced if it becomes contaminated and after any major
repairs.
Remove the filler cap from the reservoir [B].
Remove the screen from the fill pipe [C].
P–4036
Remove fluid from the hydraulic reservoir.
Wash the screen in clean solvent. Install the screen in the
fill pipe. C
Remove the filter element and install a new filter element.
Add hydraulic/hydrostatic fluid to the reservoir (See
Specifications, Page 9–1 for the correct fluid). DO NOT
fill above the sight glass.
Operate the loader. Stop the engine and check the fluid
level. Add as needed.
P–4057

W–2012–0290
553 Loader
SPARK ARRESTOR MUFFLER
Cleaning Procedure
A
See the Service Schedule Page 1–3 for service interval
for cleaning the spark arrestor muffler.
Do not operate the loader with a defective exhaust
system.
P–1681
This loader is factory equipped with a U.S.D.A.
Forestry Service approved spark arrestor
muffler. It is necessary to do maintenance on
this spark arrestor muffler to keep it in working
condition. The spark arrestor muffler must be
serviced by dumping the spark chamber every
100 hours of operation.
If this machine is operated on flammable forest,
brush or grass covered land, it must be When an engine is running in an enclosed area,
equipped with a spark arrestor attached to the fresh air must be added to avoid concentration
exhaust system and maintained in working of exhaust fumes. If the engine is stationary,
order. Failure to do so will be in violation of vent the exhaust outside. Exhaust fumes
California State Law, Section 4442 PRC. contain odorless, invisible gases which can kill
without warning.
Make reference to local laws and regulations for W–2050–1285
spark arrestor requirements. Stop engine and allow the muffler to cool before
I–2022–1285
cleaning the spark chamber. Wear safety
glasses or goggles. Failure to obey can cause
Stop the engine. Open the rear door and rear grill. serious injury.
W–2011–1285
Remove the plug (Item 1) [A] from the bottom of the
muffler.
Never use machine in atmosphere with

explosive dust or gases or where exhaust can
contact flammable material. Failure to obey
warnings can cause injury or death.
W–2068–1285
Start the engine.

Have a second person (wearing safety glasses) hold a
piece of wood over the outlet of the muffler (with the
engine running) for about 10 seconds.
Stop the engine and install the plug. Close the rear door.
553 Loader
TIRE MAINTENANCE
Wheel Nuts
A
interval to check the wheel nuts. The correct torque is
105–115 ft.–lbs. (142–156 Nm) torque [A].
Tire Rotation
Check the tires regularly for wear, damage and pressure.
(See Specifications, Page 9–1 for the correct tire
pressure.)
Rear tires usually wear faster than front tires. To keep tire
wear even, move the front tires to the rear and rear tires P–4030
to the front [B].
It is important to keep the same size tires on each side of
the loader. Different sizes cause excessive wear. The
B
tread bars of all the tires must face the same direction.
Recommended tire pressure must be maintained to avoid
excessive tire wear and loss of stability and handling
capability. Check for the correct pressure before
operating the loader.
Tire Mounting
Tires are to be repaired only by an authorized person
using the proper procedures and safety equipment. Tires
and rims must always be checked for correct size before
mounting. Check rim and tire bead for damage.
C–1965
The rim flange must be cleaned and free of rust. The tire
bead and rim flange must be lubricated with a rubber
lubricant before mounting the tire, avoid excessive
pressure which can rupture the tire and cause serious
injury or death. During inflation of the tire, check the tire
pressure frequently to avoid over inflation.
Do not inflate tires above specified pressure.

Failure to use correct tire mounting procedure
can cause an explosion which can result in
injury or death. W–2078–1285
Inflate tires to the MAXIMUM pressure shown

on the sidewall of the tire. DO NOT mix brands
of tires used on the same loader.
I–2057–0794
553 Loader
FINAL DRIVE TRANSMISSION (CHAINCASE)
A
Checking and Adding Oil
The chaincase contains the final drive sprockets and
chains and uses the same type of oil as the
hydraulic/hydrostatic system. (See Specifications
Section, Page 9–1.)
1
Drive the loader on a level surface. Stop the engine.
Remove the plug (Item 1) [A] from the front of the
chaincase housing.
If oil can be reached with the tip of the your finger through
the hole the oil level is correct. P–1714
If the level is low, add oil through the check plug hole until
the oil flows from the hole. Install and tighten the plug. B
Removing Oil From the Chaincase
To drain the oil from the chaincase, remove the plug (Item
1) [B] located in the front of the chaincase.
P–5822
Use a transfer pump and remove the oil from the

chaincase [C]. C
P–5823
553 Loader
LUBRICATION OF THE LOADER
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–PreventiveMaintenanceSectionPart1of2
Procedure
A
Lubricate the loader as specified in the Service Schedule
Page 1–3 for the best performance of the loader.
Record the operating hours each time you lubricate the
Bobcat loader.
Always use a good quality lithium based multi–purpose
grease when you lubricate the loader. Apply the lubricant
until extra grease shows. 1
Lubricate the following locations on the loader:
1. Rod End Lift Cylinder (both sides) [A]. P–1708
2. Base End Lift Cylinder (both sides) [B].

B
P–4026
3. Lift Arm Pivot Pin (both sides) [C]. C

3
P–1691
4. Base End Tilt Cylinder [D]. D
P–4056
553 Loader
LUBRICATION OF THE LOADER (Cont’d)
A
Procedure (Cont’d)
5. Rod End Tilt Cylinder ]A].
6. Bob–Tach Pivot Pin (both sides) [A]. 5
P–1713
7. 250 Hours: Steering Lever Shaft Bearings (2) [B]

& [C]. B
P–1705
P–4035
8. 250 Hours: U–Joint Grease Fittings (3) [D]. D
P–5981
553 Loader
REMOTE START SWITCH
Procedure
A
The tool listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:
MEL1429 – Remote Start Switch

death.
W–2017–0286
The Remote Start Switch (Item 1) [A] is required when the

operator cab is in the raised position for service and the
service technician needs to start the engine. The operator
cab wire harness connectors must be separated from the
engine wiring harness connector under the cab.
The remote start switch is required when the service
technician is adjusting the steering linkage and checking
the hydraulic/hydrostatic system.
1
Lift and block the loader. (See Page 1–1.)
P–7100
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm support
device. (See Page 1–1.)
Raise the operator cab. (See Page 1–1.) B
Connect the remote start switch to the connectors (Item
1) [B] as shown.
P–7099
553 Loader
REMOTE START SWITCH (Cont’d)
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–PreventiveMaintenanceSectionPart2of2
A
Procedure (Cont’d) 1
Put the traction lock override switch (Item 1) [A] in the ON
position so the traction function is locked. The wheels are
not able to turn.
Turn the key to the right and start the engine.
P–4713
Move the traction lock override switch (Item 1) [B] to the

OFF position so the traction function is unlocked. The
wheels are now able to turn.
B
1
The auxiliary mode switch (Item 2) [B] is used to turn the
front auxiliary quick couplers ON and OFF during relief
pressure and flow tests.
2
B–4714
NOTE: On current model loaders, the connector on

the BICS™ harness is a round 7–pin C
connector, not a rectangular 8–pin
connector. Use the adapter harness (Item 1)
[C] if your loader has a round 7–pin BICS
harness connector.
1
P–7101
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Page
Number
CONTROL PEDALS
Pedal Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43 HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM
CROSSMEMBER LINKAGE
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–46
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE
Checking the Main Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Identification Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Main Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Main Relief Valve Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
Disassembly and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
Load Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
Main Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
Anti–Cavitation Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
Rubber Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
Lift Spool Detent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
Tilt Centering Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
Auxiliary Spool Detent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
One Way Restrictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
Spool Seal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER IDENTIFICATION
Lift Cylinder Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
Tilt Cylinder Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
HYDRAULIC FILTER HOUSING
HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Checking the Output of the Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
Main Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
Flare Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
O–ring Face Seal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Straight Thread O–ring Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
Tubelines and Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
LIFT CYLINDER(S)
Checking the Lift Cylinder(s) For Internal Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (Cont’d)
Page
Number
PEDAL INTERLOCK LINKAGE
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45
TILT CYLINDER
Checking the Tilt Cylinder For Internal Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
TIGHTEN ALL HARDWARE PER SIZE TO GRADE 5 TORQUE (SEE

STANDARD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS, SECTION 9)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC SCHEMATIC PORT BLOCK
TM
553 BICS 2
MALE QUICK COUPLER
1 BUCKET POSITION VALVE (OPTIONAL)
(Printed November 1995)
B
4
FRONT AUXILIARY
D
3 QUICK-COUPLERS
A 22 23
FEMALE QUICK COUPLER
CONTROL VALVE A
DRIVE MOTOR
OIL
COOLER 11
AUXILIARY SPOOL
NEUTRAL POSITION 25 C
B A 24
26
12 TILT CYLINDER
B
13
HYDRAULIC FILTER
6 TANDEM PISTON PUMP WITH GEAR PUMP 14

TILT CYLINDER SPOOL
NEUTRAL POSITION B A
7
B A
12
10
15
LIFT CYLINDER SPOOL LIFT LOCK VALVE
NEUTRAL POSITION
B A
INLET 8
CHARGE
8 21
5
16 12
10
D C
LIFT
17 CYLINDERS
9
INLET OUTLET P1 L1
20
DRIVE MOTOR TILT LOCK VALVE WITH SOLENOID P2
19 X PT
PP
18
17
WORKING CIRCUITS
11 PILOT CIRCUITS
DRAIN CIRCUITS
PT X B1 COMPONENTS
Printed in U.S.A. MC 2191 (10-20-95)

2 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are
most common. Many of the recommended procedures Check for correct function after adjustments,
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel repairs or service. Failure to make correct
only. repairs or adjustments can cause injury or
death.
W–2004–1285
PROBLEM CAUSE
The hydraulic system will not operate. 1, 2, 3, 5, 8

The transmission warning light comes ON when hydraulics are
operating. 1, 3
Slow hydraulic system action. 1, 3, 4, 6, 8
Hydraulic action is not smooth. 1, 4, 5, 6, 7

Lift arms go up slowly at full engine RPM. 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9
The lift arms or Bob–Tach will move when the pedal is in neutral position. 4
The lift arms come down with the pedal in the neutral position. 4, 9, 10, 11
KEY TO CORRECT THE CAUSE
1. The fluid level is not correct.

2. The pedal linkage is disconnected.
3. The hydraulic pump has damage.
4. The pedal linkage is not adjusted correctly.

5. Relief valve is not at the correct pressure.
6. Suction leak on the inlet side of the hydraulic pump.
7. Fluid is cold. Wrong viscosity fluid (See Section 9).

8. Using the loader for more than its rated capacity.
9. Internal leak in the lift cylinder(s).

10. External leak from the lift cylinder(s).
11. Damaged lift spool.
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
A Mark a Line on Nut
Flats of Both Nuts
When making repairs on hydrostatic and Tighten to Correct

hydraulic systems, clean the work area before Amount from Chart
disassembly and keep all parts clean. Always
use caps and plugs on hoses, tubelines and
ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly damage
the system.
I–2003–0284
A–1897
Flare Connections
Use the following procedure to tighten the flare fitting:
B
Tube Size Rotate No.
Wrench Size Outside Dia. Thread Size of Hex Flats
Tighten the nut until it makes contact with the seat. Make
a mark across the flats of both the male and female parts 5/8’’ 5/16’’ 1/2’’ – 20 2–1/2
of the connection [A]. 11/16’’ 3/8’’ 9/16’’ – 18 2
7/8’’ 1/2’’ 3/4’’ – 16 2
Use the chart to find the correct tightness needed.[B]. If 1’’ 5/8’’ 7/8’’ – 14 1–1/2 – 2
the fitting leaks after tightening, disconnect it and inspect
the seat area for damage. 1–1/4’’ 3/4’’ 1–1/16’’ – 12 1
1–3/8’’ 1’’ 1–5/16’’ – 12 3/4 – 1
2’’ 1–1/4’’ 1–5/8’’ – 12 3/4 – 1
2–1/4’’ 1–1/2’’ 1–7/8’’ – 12 1/2 – 3/4
O–ring Face Seal Connection

When the fitting is tightened, you can feel when the fitting
C
is tight to eliminate leakage caused by under or over
torqued fittings. Use vaseline petroleum jelly to hold the
O–ring in position until the fittings are assembled [C].
B–7575
Straight Thread O–ring Fitting

Lubricate the O–ring before installing the fitting. Loosen D
the jam nut and install the fitting. Tighten the jam nut until
the washer is tight against the surface [D].
Nut Nut
Tubelines and Hoses
Replace any tubelines that are bent or flattened. They will Washer Washer
restrict flow, which will slow hydraulic action and cause O–ring
heat.
O–ring
Replace hoses which show signs of wear, damage or
weather cracked rubber.
Always use two wrenches when loosening and tightening
hose or tubeline fittings. A–1852
553 Loader
LIFT CYLINDER(S)
Removal and Installation
A
Stop the engine. Pull up on the lift arm bypass control and
move the lift pedal to release the hydraulic pressure.
Raise the seat bar. Raise the operator cab. (See Page
1–1.)
Install a lifting strap around the center of the lift arms
crossmember as shown [A].
Fasten the lifting strap to a chain hoist and raise the lift
arms slightly as shown [A].
P–5854
Remove the retainer bolt (Item 1) [B] and nut from the rod
end pivot pin.
B
Installation: Tighten the retainer bolt and nut to 18–20 1
ft.–lbs. (24–27 Nm) torque.
Remove the rod end pivot pin (Item 2) [B] from the
cylinder.
Remove the retainer bolt (Item 1) [C] and nut from the
base end pivot pin. 2
Installation: Tighten the retainer bolt and nut to 18–20
Remove the base end pivot pin (Item 2) [C] from the P–5847
cylinder.
Slide the lift cylinder forward and lift it up to access the two
(2) cylinder supply hoses [D]. C
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [D] from the lift cylinder
base end port.
Disconnect the hose (Item 2) [D] from the lift cylinder rod 1
end tubeline.
Remove the lift cylinder from the lift arm.
2
Use the reverse removal procedure to install the lift
cylinder.
Checking the Lift Cylinder(s) For Internal Leakage
P–5851
Follow steps [A] thru [C] to remove lift cylinder so the
checking procedure can be performed
Check only one cylinder at a time. D
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [D] from the lift cylinder
base end port.
Install a plug in the hose (Item 1) [D] and tighten the plug. 2
Lower the seat bar and start the engine, be sure the 1
parking brake is engaged.
Push the top (toe) of the lift pedal.
If there is leakage from the open base end port of the lift
cylinder, remove the lift cylinder for repair.
P–5852
553 Loader
TILT CYLINDER
A
1
Remove the attachment from the Bob–Tach.
Roll the Bob–Tach fully out until it rests on the floor.
Stop the engine and raise the seat bar.
Remove the retainer bolt (Item 1) [A] and nut from the tilt
cylinder rod end pivot pin.
P–5830
Remove the pivot pin (Item 1) [B] from the tilt cylinder. B
1
NOTE: Do not use a hammer and punch on the end
of the pivot pin with the lubrication fitting.
Damage can occur to the lubrication fitting.
P–5827
Retract the tilt cylinder to prevent damage to the rod

during removal [C]. C
Disconnect the rod and base end hoses (Items 1) [C] from
the tilt cylinder.
P–5848
Remove the retainer bolt and nut (Item 1) [D] from the
base end pivot pin.
D
P–5844
553 Loader
TILT CYLINDER (Cont’d)
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
A
Fasten a lifting strap to the center of the lift arms
crossmember as shown [A].
Fasten the lifting strap to a chain hoist and raise the lift
arms up for clearance to remove the base end pivot pin
from the tilt cylinder.
1
Remove the base end pivot pin (Item 1) [A] from the tilt
cylinder.
Remove the tilt cylinder from the loader.
Use the reverse removal procedure to install the tilt P–5853
cylinder.
Checking the Tilt Cylinder For Internal Leakage

B
Remove the attachment from the Bob–Tach.
Retract the tilt cylinder (Item 1) [B] the way. 2
1
NOTE: The Bob–Tach is disconnected from the tilt
cylinder for clarity purposes only.
P–5848
Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can

have sufficient force to enter a person’s body
by penetrating the skin. This can cause serious
injury and possibly death if proper medical
treatment by a physician familiar with this
injury is not received immediately.
W–2145–0290
Disconnect the hose (Item 2) [B] from the base end of the
tilt cylinder.
Install a plug in the hose and tighten the plug.
Lower the seat bar and start the engine, be sure the
parking brake is engaged.
Push the bottom (heel) of the tilt pedal.
If there is leakage from the open port of the tilt cylinder,
remove the cylinder for repair.
553 Loader
Lift Cylinder Components
1. Case 9. O–ring
2. Piston 10. O–ring
3. Head 11. Washer
4. Rod 12. Seal
5. Spacer 13. Seal
6. O–ring 14. Plug
7. Nut 15. O–ring
8. Ring 16. Tube
2
4
*7
14
15
6
13
16
12
1
14 3
15
11
10
* Tighten to 180 ft.–lbs. (244 Nm) torque. TS–1097
553 Loader
Tilt Cylinder Components
1. Cylinder 10. Seal

2. Case 11. Seal
3. Nut 12. Rod
4. Piston 13. Seal
5. Seal 14. Tube
6. O–ring 15. Clamp
7. O–ring 16. Bolt
8. Washer 17. Nut
9. Head
MC–1688
11
16 12
7 1
13
2
8
15
9
3
14 10
4
MC–1688
* Tighten to 450 ft.–lbs. (610 Nm) torque. C–2808
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
A
Disassembly
Tools necessary for the disassembly/assembly
procedures:
MEL1074 – O–ring Seal Hook
MEL1075 – Adjustable Gland Nut Wrench
MEL1396 – Seal Installation Tool
MEL1033 – Rod Seal Installation Tool
Piston Ring Compressor
NOTE: The drawings may not show the cylinder

exactly as it appears, but the procedure is
correct for all cylinders.
B–7000
See the Service Manual for your model loader to find the
correct information for removing and installing the
cylinder. B
Put the base end of the hydraulic cylinder in a drain pan.
Move the rod in and out to remove the fluid from the
cylinder. Move the rod slowly so the fluid will go directly
into the drain pan.
Put the base end of the cylinder in a vise.
Use the adjustable gland nut wrench to loosen the head
[A].
Remove the rod assembly from the cylinder case [B].

Remove the cylinder case from the vise. B–7001
Put the rod end in the vise.

C
Remove the nut from the piston end of the rod [C].
B–7002
Pull the piston off the rod (Item 1) [D].

D
Pull the head (Item 2) [D] off the rod. 2
B–7003
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
Disassembly (Cont’d)
A
If the head has a seal, remove the seal from the head [A].
B–7004
Remove the O–ring and backup washer from the head

[B]. B
B–7199
Remove the wiper seal [C].

C
B–7005
Remove the oil seal from the head [D].

D
B–7006
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER (Cont’d)
Disassembly (Cont’d)
A
Remove the piston seal from the piston [A].
B–3689
Remove the O–ring from the piston [B].

Wash the cylinder parts in solvent and air dry them.
B
While servicing the cylinder do not damage the parts.
Inspect for nicks, scratches or otherwise damaged or
bent parts before assembling the cylinder. Replace parts
that appear damaged in any way. The cylinder may not
function correctly if there is damage to any of the parts.
Destroy all the O–rings and seals and replace them with
NEW O–rings and seals.
B–3703
Assembly
Install the O–ring on the piston [C]. C
B–12812
NOTE: Do not overstretch the seal.

D
Install the seal on the tool and stretch it until it fits the
piston [D].
Allow the O–ring to stretch for 30 seconds before
removing it from the tool.
B–12809
553 Loader
Assembly (Cont’d)
A
Install the seal on the piston [A].
B–12813
Use a ring compressor to compress the seal to the correct

size [B]. B
Leave the piston in the ring compressor for three minutes.
B–12811
Install the oil seal on the rod seal tool [C].
NOTE: The O–ring side of the oil seal goes toward
the inside of the cylinder. C
B–3702
Install the oil seal in the head [D].

D
B–3671
553 Loader
Assembly (Cont’d)
A
Install the wiper seal with the lip toward the outside of the
head [A].
B–3682
Install the backup washer on the head [B] & [C].

B
B–7008
B–7200
Install the O–ring next to the backup ring [D].

D
B–7007
553 Loader
Assembly (Cont’d)
A
If a seal was removed from the head use the following
procedure to install a new one.
NOTE: Do not overstretch the seal.
Install the seal on the tool and stretch it until it fits the
piston [A].
Allow the O–ring to stretch for 30 seconds before
removing it from the tool.
NOTE: Do not turn (roll) the seal as you install it.
Damage to the seal may result. B–12809
Use a ring compressor to compress the seal to the correct

size [B]. Leave the tool over the seal for five minutes. B
B–14305
Install the head on the rod [C].
C
B–7011
Install the piston on the rod [D].
B–7198
553 Loader
Assembly (Cont’d)
A
Lubricate the threads and install the nut [A].
See Page 9–1 for the correct torque specifications.
Remove the rod from the vise.
Install the cylinder case in the vise.
B–7002
Put oil on the seal surface of the cylinder case [B].

B
B–7013
Put oil on the teflon seal on the piston [C].

C
B–7012
553 Loader
Assembly (Cont’d)
A
Install the rod assembly in the cylinder case [A].
B–7001
Put oil on the seals on the head [B].

Put oil on the threads of the head.
B
B–7014
Use the adjustable gland nut wrench to tighten the head

[C].
C
B–7000
Replace the seal on the rod end (if so equipped) if it shows

signs of wear or damage [D].
D
B–7015
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE
A 1
When making repairs on hydrostatic and

hydraulic systems, clean the work area before
the system. P–5943
I–2003–0284
device. (See Page 1–1.) Stop the engine.
B
Pull up on the lift arm bypass control and move the lift
pedal to release the hydraulic pressure. Raise the seat
bar.
Lift and block the rear corners. (See Page 1–1.)
Raise the operator cab. (See Page 1–1.)
Remove the control panel from the loader. (See Page
5–1.)
1
Thoroughly clean the control valve area.
P–5942
Disconnect the lift, tilt and auxiliary spool linkages from
the control valve (Item 1) [A].
Disconnect the control valve inlet hose (Item 1) [B] which C
comes from the hydraulic pump.
Remove the two tubelines (Item 1) [C] that are routed

over the control valve which come from the lift lock valve.
1
P–5946
Disconnect the front (rod end) tubeline (Item 1) [D] from

the lift section of the control valve. D
P–5948
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (Cont’d)
A
2
Disconnect the front (rod end) tubeline (Item 1) [A] from
the tee fitting on the tilt section of the control valve.
NOTE: The tee fitting located in this port is capped

because it is not equipped with an optional
bucket position valve. If the loader has a
bucket position valve, disconnect the
tubeline from this fitting. 1
Disconnect the return tubeline (Item 2) [A] which tees into
the fitting located on the inlet port of the control valve.
P–5949
Disconnect the rear (base end) tubeline (Item 1) [B] from

the lift section of the control valve. B
1
P–5950
Disconnect the rear (base end) tubeline (Item 1) [C] from

the tee fitting of the tilt section of the control valve. C
NOTE: The tee fitting located in this port is capped 1
because it is not equipped with an optional
bucket position valve. If the loader has a
bucket position valve, disconnect the
tubeline from this fitting.
P–5951
Disconnect the two (2) tubelines (Item 1) [D] from the

auxiliary section of the control valve. D
Disconnect the (2) tubelines (Item 2) [D] from the outlet 1
port of the control valve.
P–5947
553 Loader
A
1
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts (Item 1) [A] from the
control valve.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 18–20 ft.–lbs.
(24–27 Nm) torque.
Remove the control valve from the loader.
Use the reverse removal procedure to install the hydraulic
control valve.
P–5953
553 Loader
Checking the Main Relief Valve
A
NOTE: The following procedure is for checking the
main relief valve only. Use this procedure
when it is known that the hydraulic pump is
in good working condition. If the hydraulic 2
pump is not working correctly, refer to
checking the output of the hydraulic pump
(Page 2–36).
The tools listed will be needed to do the following
procedure:
MEL10003 – Hydraulic Tester
MEL10006 – Hydraulic Test Kit 1
P–5933
Connect the IN port of the hydraulic tester to the bottom
(female) quick coupler (Item 1) [A] on the loader.
B
’
Connect the OUT port of the hydraulic tester to the top
(male) quick coupler (Item 2) [A] on the loader.
The hydraulic tester must be in the fully open

position before you start the engine.
I–2024–0284 P–5931

death.
W–2017–0286
Remove the auxiliary hydraulics lock bolt.

Start the engine and run at low idle RPM. Push the right
steering lever all the way to the right to engage the front
auxiliary hydraulics detent [B].
Increase the engine speed to full RPM. Watch the flow
meter on the hydraulic tester to make sure the flow is
correct.
The correct pressure for the main relief valve is
1600–1650 PSI (11030–11375 kPa). When the engine is running during service, the
steering levers must be in neutral and the
If the relief valve pressure is not correct, stop the engine. parking brake engaged. Failure to do so can
Adjust or replace the main relief valve. (See Page 2–1.) cause injury or death.
W–2006–0284
When the test is complete, move the steering lever back
to center to disengage the front auxiliary hydraulics.
553 Loader
Main Relief Valve Removal and Installation
A
Clean the area around the control valve. Loosen and
remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [A].
Installation: Tighten the main relief valve to 35–40 1

the system.
I–2003–0284
NOTE: The engine has been removed for clarity only.

It does not need to be removed to remove the
main relief valve.
Main Relief Valve Adjustment

If the main relief pressure is not correct, it needs to be
adjusted. P–7071
An adjusting screw is located on the end of the main relief

valve (Item 1) [A].
B
Remove the end cap (Item 1) [B] from the main relief
valve. O–ring
Turn the adjusting screw in (increase pressure) or out
(decrease pressure) until the correct main relief pressure
1600–1650 PSI (11030–11375 kPa) is obtained.
If the correct pressure can not be obtained, remove the
main relief valve from the the main control valve (See 1
procedure above).
Remove the O–rings and backup washers from the main
relief valve [B]. Backup
B–6764
Clean the main relief valve in clean solvent. Use air
pressure to dry the valve.
Install new O–rings and backup washers. Install the main
relief valve (Item 1) [B] and tighten. Readjust the main
relief valve to the correct setting.
NOTE: If the correct pressure can not be obtained
after cleaning and readjusting the main relief
valve, replace the relief valve. Also check the
pressure of the new relief valve.
553 Loader
A G1 G3
Identification Chart
F1
Item 553
G2
A1 Lift Cylinder Rod End
F2
A2 Tilt Cylinder Rod End
(Internal Restrictor .109’’)
A3 Auxiliary Coupler
B1 Lift Cylinder Base End
(Internal Restrictor .125’’) B1 B2 B3
B2 Tilt Cylinder Base End

B3 Auxiliary Coupler C1 C2 C3
C1 Lift Load Check INLET
C2 Tilt Load Check A1 A2 A3

OUTLET
C3 Auxiliary Load Check
D1 Lift Spool
D2 Tilt Spool
D3 Auxiliary Spool E1
E1 Plug D1 D2 D3
B–6283
F1 Relief Valve
F2 Anti–Cav. Valve
G1 Lift Detent
G2 Tilt Centering Spring
G3 Auxiliary Detent
553 Loader
Disassembly and Assembly
A
Refer to Page 2–1 (Control Valve Identification Chart) for 1
the correct location of the parts for each Model control
valve.

disassembly and keep all parts clean. Always P–7263
the system.
I–2003–0284 B
Mark each valve section and spool so that the parts will
be returned to their original bore during assembly.
Use bolts to fasten the control valve to a work bench for
easier disassembly and assembly.
Load Check Valve
Loosen the load check plug (Item 1) [A] (C port) See 2
Control Valve Identification Chart, Page 2–1. 1
3
Assemble: Always use new O–ring. Tighten the plug to
P–7265
35–40 ft.–lbs. (47–54 Nm) torque.
Remove the load check plug (Item 1) [B], spring (Item 2)

[B], and load check valve (Item 3) [B].
553 Loader
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–HydraulicSystemSectionPart1of2
Main Relief Valve

A
Loosen the main relief valve (Item 1) [A].
Assembly: Always use new O–rings and backup
washers. Tighten to 35–40 ft.–lbs. (47–54 Nm) torque.
1
P–7267
Remove the main relief valve (Item 1) [B] from the control
valve. B
1
P–7268
Remove the O–ring (Item 1) [C], backup washer (Item 2)

[C], glide ring (Item 3) [C] and O–ring (under the glide C
ring) from the main relief valve. 1
2 3
P–7262
553 Loader
Anti–Cavitation Valve
A
Loosen the anti–cavitation valve (Item 1) [A].
1
Assembly: Always use new O–rings and backup
washers. Tighten to 35–40 ft.–lbs. (47–54 Nm) torque.
NOTE: The anti–cavitation valve can be located on
either side of the control valve (E1 or F2
ports) See Control Valve Identification Chart,
Page 2–23.
P–7271
Remove the anti–cavitation valve (Item 1) [B] from the

control valve. B
Remove the O–ring (Item 2) [B].
2
Remove the O–ring (Item 3) [B] and backup washer.
1 3
P–7270
553 Loader
Rubber Boot
A
Remove the two screws (Item 1) [A] from the rubber boot
retainer.
Assembly: Tighten the screws to 90–100 in.–lbs.
(10,2–11,3 Nm) torque.
1
P–7264
B
Remove the rubber boot (Item 1) [B] and boot retainer
(Item 2) [B].
2
Remove the O–ring retainer plate (Item 3) [B] and O–ring
(Item 4) [B]. 1
Assembly: Use a new O–ring (Item 4) [B] for assembly.
4
3
P–7273
Remove the spool (Item 1) [C] from the control valve.

(See Lift Spool Detent Page 2–28 for the correct C
procedure.) The spool seal (Item 2) [C] will remain seated
in the spool chamber after the spool is removed.
Remove the spool seal (Item 2) [C] from the control valve.
Assembly: Lubricate the spool seal and install the spool
seal (Item 2) [C] on the spool as shown. Push the spool
seal into the control valve. Be sure the spool seal is evenly
installed against the seat in the spool chamber. 2
P–7277
553 Loader
Lift Spool Detent
A
procedure:
MEL1278 – Detent Tool
2
The lift spool detent (Item 1) [A] is located next to the main
relief valve (Item 2) [A].
1 P–7271
Remove the two (2) screws (Item 1) [B] from the detent
cap (Item 2) [B].
B
Remove the snap ring (Item 3) [B] and washer (Item 4)
[B]. 2
The detent assembly has small springs and

balls. Do not lose these parts during 1 3
disassembly and assembly.
4
I–2012–0284 P–7272
Remove the detent cap (Item 1) [C]. C

Wrap a clean rag around the detent sleeve (Item 2) [C] to
prevent losing the two (2) detent balls.
NOTE: The detent sleeve (Item 2) [C] is longer than
the detent sleeve located on the auxiliary
spool. DO NOT switch the sleeves from one
spool to the other.
2
P–7276
Remove the detent sleeve (Item 1) [D], two (2) detent

balls (Item 2) [D], and detent spring (Item 3) [D]. D
Remove the rubber boot assembly from the control valve
(linkage side). (See Page 2–27 for the correct procedure.)
3
2
1
P–7275
553 Loader
Lift Spool Detent (Cont’d)
A
3
Remove the spool assembly (Item 1) [A] backup washer
(Item 2) [A], and spool seal (Item 3) [A] from the control
valve.
1
P–7274
Put the linkage end of the spool assembly (Item 1) [B] in
a vise.
Install MEL1285 Spring Compressor Tool (Item 1) [B] on
B
the spring assembly.
Loosen the detent adapter [B].
1
The detent assembly has small springs and

balls. Do not lose these parts during
disassembly and assembly.
I–2012–0284 P–7306
Wrap a clean rag around the assembled detent adapter C

(Item 1) [C] and adapter retainer (Item 2) [C].
2
Remove the detent adapter (Item 1) [C] from the adapter
retainer (Item 2) [C]. 1
Remove the detent spring (Item 3) [C] and detent balls
(Item 4) [C]. 6
Remove the centering spring (Item 5) [C] and end cap 5
(Item 6) [C] from the spool. 3
P–7280
Lift Spool Only: Remove the stud from the end of the
spool [D]. D
P–7278
553 Loader
A
Lift Spool Detent (Cont’d) 2
Removal of the plastic plug [A]:
• Make a center point in the plug using a 3/16’’ drill.
• Drill a hole all the way through the plug using a 7/64’’
tap drill.
1
• Turn a 6–62 tap into the plug. Pull the tap and plug out
of the spool. BE CAREFUL, do not break the tap. 0.60’’
(15,2 mm)
• Clean all the debris from the inside of the spool bore.
Assembly: Install the new plastic plug (Item 1) [A] and B–9973
O–ring (Item 2) [A]. Install the stud and leave 0.60’’ (15,2
mm) past the end of the spool [A].
NOTE: DO NOT USE LOCTITE ON THE STUD
B
THREADS. DO NOT EXCEED 70 in.–lbs. (8 1
Nm) torque during stud installation. Excess
torque may cause spool distortion resulting
in sticky spool operation.
NOTE: Put grease on all detent component surfaces

before assembly. 2
Install the detent balls and spring into the detent adapter
(Item 1) [B]. Hold the detent balls in position with the tool
and install the detent adapter into the end cap (Item 2) 3
[B].
NOTE: The detent cap (Item 3) [B] shown, is used for P–7282
support during assembly.
Install the spool seal and backup washer on the spool.
(See Page 2–34 for correct installation procedure for the C
spool seal.)
Use MEL1285 Compression Spring Tool and install the
centering spring retainer, centering spring, and detent 1
adapter/end cap assembly on the spool. (See Page 2–29
for correct installation sequence of these parts.)
Tighten the detent adapter (Item 1) [C] to 90–100 in.–lbs.
(10,2–11,3 Nm) torque.
P–7306
Install the spool assembly (Item 1) [D] in the control valve. D
P–7274
553 Loader
Lift Spool Detent (Cont’d)
A
Hold the detent balls and spring in position with the tool
[A].
P–7283
Install the detent sleeve over the balls and into position
[B].
B
P–7285
Install the detent cap (Item 1) [C].

C
Install the washer and snap ring [C].
Install the mounting bolts [C].
Tighten the mounting bolts to 90–100 in.–lbs. (10,2–11,3
Nm) torque.
1 P–7271
553 Loader
Tilt Centering Spring
A
Remove the end cap mounting screws (Item 1) [A].
Assembly: Tighten the mounting screws to 90–100
in.–lbs. (10,2–11,3 Nm) torque.
Remove the spool end cap (Item 2) [A]. 2
Remove the spool and centering spring assembly from
the control valve [A]. 1
Assembly: If the centering spring bolt is removed, tighten 1
it to 90–100 in.–lbs. (10,2–11,3 Nm) torque.
P–7284
Put grease on all the center spring component parts.
Always use a new spool seal.
B
Auxiliary Spool Detent
Remove the two (2) mounting screws (Item 1) [B] from
the detent cap (Item 2) [B].
5
Remove the snap ring (Item 3) [B] and washer (Item 4)
[B]. 2
Remove the detent cap (Item 2) [B]. 1
Refer to the Lift Spool Detent Page 2–28 for the correct
removal and disassembly procedures. These procedures 1 4
are the same for the Auxiliary Spool Detent.
3 P–7287
NOTE: The detent sleeve (Item 5) [B] is shorter than
the detent sleeve on the lift spool. DO NOT
switch the sleeves from one spool to the
other.
553 Loader
One Way Restrictors
A
A one way restrictor is located in the lift section (B1 port
– Item 1) [A] of the control valve. 1
P–7267
Remove the fitting (Item 1) [B] and remove the restrictor

(Item 2) [B].
B
The restrictor size is 0.125’’ (3,175 mm).
2
1
P–7269
There is also a one way restrictor located in the tilt section

(A2 port – Item 1) [C] of the control valve. C
1
Remove the tee fitting (Item 1) [D] and remove the

restrictor (Item 2) [D].
P–7263
The restrictor size is 0.110’’ (2,794 mm).
Inspection
D
Check the spools for wear or scratches.
Check that the spools are not loose in their bore. 2
1
Check that the centering springs are not broken.
Check that the load check valve seats are not worn.
Check the load check poppets for damage.
Check the rubber boots and retainers that they are not
worn or damaged.
Replace the parts as needed. P–7266
553 Loader
Spool Seal Installation
A
To install new spool seals when the centering spring (tilt
spool) or the detent assembly (lift spool) are not removed
from the spool, use the following procedure:
Check the seal surface area (in the control valve) for rust,
corrosion, scratches, etc. Correct any irregularities
before continuing. 1
Install the backup washer on the spool.
Put plastic material on the valve spool [A].
Put clean oil on the spool seal. Install the spool seal (Item CD–15080
1) [A] on the spool being careful not to damage the seal
on the sharp edges.
Remove the plastic material.
B
Install the spool into the control valve.
Slide the linkage end spool seal (Item 1) [B] over the
rubber boot groove.
Be careful not to damage the spool seal.
P–7277
Install the O–ring (Item 1) [C] and O–ring retainer plate

(Item 2) [C]. C
Install the rubber boot retainer (Item 3) [C] and rubber
boot (Item 4) [C]. 3
Install the two (2) mounting screws and tighten to 90–100 4
in.–lbs. (10,2–11,3 Nm) torque.
Continue assembling the control valve.
1
2
P–7273
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC PUMP
A
3

disassembly and keep all parts clean. Always 2
use caps and plugs on hoses, tubelines and 1
the system.
I–2003–0284 P–5956
device. (See Page 1–1.) B
Drain the hydraulic reservoir. (See Page 1–1.)
Disconnect the inlet hose (Item 1) [A] from the hydraulic 2
pump. 1
Disconnect the outlet hose (Item 2) [A] from the hydraulic
pump.
P–7112
hydraulic pump.
Installation: Tighten the hydraulic pump mounting bolts
to 25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
Remove the hydraulic pump from the hydrostatic pump.
Remove and inspect the shaft coupler (Item 1) [B] from
the hydraulic pump shaft.
Remove the O–ring (Item 2) [B] from the hydraulic pump
mounting flange.
Installation: Install a new O–ring on the hydraulic pump
mounting flange.
pump.

W–2103–1285
See Page 2–1 for correct assembly and disassembly

procedures for the hydraulic pump.
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC PUMP (Cont’d)
Checking the Output of the Hydraulic Pump
A
procedure:
MEL1429 – Remote Start Switch
MEL10003 – Hydraulic Tester
MEL10006 – Hydraulic Test Kit
NOTE: The relief pressure must be per specification
before the output test is performed. 1
2
P–5956

B 1 2
death.
W–2017–0286

Connect the remote start switch. (See Page 1–1.) P–7102
Disconnect the OUTLET hose (Item 1) [A] from the

hydraulic pump. Connect the OUTLET hose (Item 1) [B]
& [C] from the tester to the hose (Item 1) [A].
C
Connect the INLET hose (Item 2) [B] & [C] from the tester
to the OUTLET fitting (Item 2) [A] on the hydraulic pump.
1 2
The hydraulic tester must be in the fully open P–3739

position before you start the engine.
I–2024–0284
553 Loader
Checking the Output of the Hydraulic Pump (Cont’d)
A EXAMPLE: TESTER
CONNECTION
Reservoir
A sample tester connection is shown in picture [A].
Start the engine and run at low idle RPM. Make sure the
tester is connected correctly. If no flow is indicated on the
tester, the hoses are connected wrong. With the hoses
connected correctly, increase the engine speed to full
RPM*.
Warm the hydraulic fluid to 140° F (60° C) by turning the
restrictor control (Item 1) [A] on the tester to about 1000 Hydraulic Pump
PSI (6895 kPa). DO NOT exceed system relief pressure.
Open the restrictor control and record the free flow (GPM) Out In
at full RPM. Hydraulic Control
Valve
Remove the auxiliary hydraulics lock bolt and push the
right steering lever all the way to the right (detent) [B] to
engage the auxiliary hydraulics (attachment must be 1
disconnected from the front auxiliary couplers). The fluid
pressure will go over main relief. If the pressure does not BH–196
go over, adjust the main relief valve (see procedure
below). Record the highest pressure (PSI) and flow
(GPM). The high pressure flow must be at least 80% of
free flow.
HIGH PRESSURE FLOW (GPM)
%= X 100
FREE FLOW (GPM)
A low percentage indicates a failed pump.
*Refer to specifications (Section 9) for system relief
pressure, RPM, and hydraulic pump capacity (GPM).
Main Relief Valve Adjustment
If the main relief pressure is not correct, it needs to be
adjusted. B
An adjusting screw is located on the end of the main relief
valve (Item 1) [C].
Remove the end cap (Item 2) [C] from the main relief
valve.
Turn the adjusting screw in (increase pressure) or out
(decrease pressure) until the correct main relief pressure
1600–1650 PSI (11030–11375 kPa) is obtained.
If the correct pressure can not be obtained, remove the
main relief valve from the main control valve. (See
procedure above.)
P–5931
Remove the O–rings and backup washers from the main
relief valve [C].
C
Install new O–rings and backup washers. Install the main 1
relief valve (item 1) [C] and tighten. Readjust the main O–ring
relief valve to the correct setting.
NOTE: If the correct pressure can not be obtained
after cleaning and readjusting the main relief
valve, replace the relief valve. Also Check the
pressure setting of the new relief valve.
2
Backup
B–6764
553 Loader
Parts Identification
6
3
7
4
8
12
10
11
C–2733
MODEL: 553
Ref. Description
1 BOLT
2 HOUSING
3 PIN, dowel
4 GEAR, idler
5 GEAR, drive
6 PLATE, wear
7 DIAPHRAGM
8 GASKET
9 SEAL
10 SPRING
11 BALL
12 PLATE, front
553 Loader
A

the system. B–5937
I–2003–0284
Put the hydraulic pump in the vise. B

Put a mark across the housing of the pump for correct
assembly [A].
Remove the four bolts from the pump [B].
Assembly: Tighten the bolts to 25–28 ft.–lbs. (33–38
Nm) torque.
B–5938
Remove the pump from the vise. Hold the pump in both
hands and hit the shaft against a block of wood to
separate the pump housing [C].
C
B–5940
Remove the housing from the end of the pump [D]. D
B–5945
553 Loader
Disassembly and Assembly (Cont’d)
A
Remove the pump gears [A].
P–5946
Remove the wear plate (Item 1) [B]. B 1

Remove the gaskets and seal from the pump housing
(Item 2) [B].
B–5947
Remove the spring and steel ball from the pump housing
[C]. C
NOTE: Make sure to mark the port where the spring
and ball are removed. The ball and spring
need to be installed in the pressure side of
the pump. There can not be a direct pressure
port connected to the seal area on the
pressure side of the pump.
Assembly: Always use new O–rings, gaskets and seals
when assembling the hydraulic pump.
Inspection
Clean and dry all the parts. B–5950
Inspect the gears as follows:
1. Inspect both the drive and idler gear shafts at the D

bearing points and seal area for rough surfaces and
wear.
2. Check the face of the gears for wear.
Check for wear on the face of the wear plate (Item 1) [B].
If the wear is more than 0.0015’’ (0,038 mm) from one side
to the other, the plate must be replaced.
Check the housing in the gear area for wear.
Replace the parts as needed.
B–4426
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC FILTER HOUSING
A
Stop the engine and open the rear door.
Remove the hydraulic filter (Item 1) [A] from the filter
housing.
1
P–7048
Disconnect the tubeline (Item 1) [B] from the filter housing

which comes from the oil cooler.
B
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts (Item 2) [B] from the
filter housing.
Installation: Tighten the filter housing mounting bolts to
25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque. 1
P–7049
Pull the filter housing (attached to the hose) out of the rear
compartment [C]. C 1
Disconnect the hose (Item 1) [C] from the filter housing

and remove the filter housing.
Replace the filter housing if necessary.
Use the reverse removal procedure to install the filter
housing and filter.
P–7050
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR
A
device. (See Page 1–1.) 2
3
When making repairs on hydrostatic and P–5935

ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly damage B
the system.
I–2003–0284 1
Disconnect the return tubeline (Item 1) [A] from the

hydraulic reservoir (Item 2) [A].
Attach a hose to the fitting on the bottom of the hydraulic 3
reservoir and drain the fluid into a container. 2
A fluid transfer pump may also be used to drain the
reservoir from the fluid fill location (Item 1) [B] if available.
Be sure to remove the fluid fill screen from the fill hole.
Remove the wiring harness clamp (Item 3) [A] from the P–5937
loader frame.
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 2) [B] and plate from the
left side of the hydraulic reservoir mounting strap.
Remove the wiring harness mounting bracket (Item 3) [B]
and pull the wiring away from the hydraulic reservoir.
Remove the hydraulic reservoir from the loader.
reservoir.
553 Loader
CONTROL PEDALS
A
1
Remove the bolt (Item 1) [A] and nut from the pedal
linkage.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt and nut to 25–28
Check the rubber bushing in the pedal for wear and
replace if necessary.
P–5923
pedal mounting bracket.
B 1
Remove the pedal assembly from the loader.

Use the reverse removal procedure to install the control
pedal.
Pedal Adjustment
After installing the pedal, it needs to be adjusted correctly.
Clearance is needed under the rear of the control pedal.
Adjust the pedal so the valve spool will travel full stroke,
without the rear of the control pedal making contact with P–5924
the floor panel.

Adjust locking tabs on pedal control linkage so
that lift and tilt control pedals are locked in
neutral when the seat bar is up.
W–2104–1285
NOTE: See Page 2–1 for the correct procedure to

adjust the pedal interlock linkage.
553 Loader
PEDAL INTERLOCK LINKAGE
A
Remove the two (2) interlock mounting nuts (Item 1) [A]
and two plastic washers.
Installation: Tighten the interlock nut to 80–90 in.–lbs.
(9–10 Nm) torque.
Remove the interlock (Item 2) [A].
P–5927
Remove the two (2) plastic washers (Item1) [B] located

between the interlock and the fender.
B
fender.
1
2
P–5932
553 Loader
PEDAL INTERLOCK LINKAGE (CONT’D)
A
1
Installation: During installation, be sure to keep the
interlock pressed against the loader frame so the plastic
washers (Item 1) [A] do not fall off the collar of each
interlock mounting nut. If the washer does not sit correctly
over the collar on the mounting nut, it will become wedged
between the fender and the mounting nut when the
mounting nut is tightened.
P–4049
Adjustment B
2
1
Adjust locking tabs on pedal control linkage so
that lift and tilt control pedals are locked in
neutral when the seat bar is up.
W–2104–1285
Check the pedal interlock linkage (Item 1) [B] so it moves P–5928

freely with the seat bar lowered.
Make sure the locking tab (Item 2) [B] on the control pedal
linkage is centered in the slot of the pedal interlock and
locks both control pedals with the seat bar raised.
If the tab is not centered, loosen the mounting nuts on the
locking tab and center the locking tab in the slot of the
pedal interlock.
Installation: Tighten the locking tab mounting nuts and
bolts to 25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
The locking tab should fit into the slot of the pedal interlock
as shown [B], when adjusted correctly.
553 Loader
CROSSMEMBER LINKAGE
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–HydraulicSystemSectionPart2of2
A
Removal and Installation 1
device.
Remove the hydrostatic pump assembly from the loader.
(See Page 3–1.)
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [A] and nut from the
from the connection point of the lift pedal linkage and the
crossmember linkage.
Installation: Tighten the linkage mounting bolt and nut to
25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
P–5984
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] from the pivot

bushing plate (Item 2) [B].
B
Installation: If the pivot bushing plate is worn or 1
damaged, remove the two mounting bolts and nuts from 2
the plate and replace it. Tighten the mounting bolts and
nuts to 25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
P–5980
Disconnect the crossmember linkage (Item 1) [C] from

the spool on the hydraulic control valve.
C 1
Remove the crossmember linkage from the loader.
Use the reverse removal procedure to install the
crossmember linkage.
P–5943
553 Loader
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
Page
Number
CONTROL PANEL
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE MOTOR

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27 HYDROSTATIC
Timing the Hydrostatic Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38 SYSTEM
HYDROSTATIC PUMP
Checking Charge Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
Drive Coupler Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION

Replenishing Valve Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
PORT BLOCK
Charge Pressure Bypass Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
Oil Cooler Bypass Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
STEERING LEVERS
STEERING LINKAGE
Pintle Lever Disassembly and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
Steering Neutral Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

553 Loader
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
assistance in locating and correcting problems which are
most common. Many of the recommended procedures
must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel Check for correct function after adjustments,
only. repairs or service. Failure to make correct
repairs or adjustments can cause injury or
death.
W–2004–1285
PROBLEM CAUSE
No drive on one side, in one direction. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 19

No drive on one side in both directions. 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8
The loader does not move in a straight line. 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 19
The hydrostatic system is overheating. 4, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15

The oil light comes ON. 16, 17, 18
1. The hydrostatic system has a fluid leak.

2. The steering linkage needs adjustment.
3. The high pressure replenishing valve(s) are defective.
4. The shuttle valve in the hydrostatic motor has a defect.
5. The balance plate in the hydrostatic motor seals are defective.
6. The hydrostatic pumps have a defect.
7. The final drive chain is broken.
8. The hydrostatic motor has a defect.
9. The tires do not have the correct tire pressure.
10. The tires are not the same size.
11. The hydrostatic fluid is not at the correct level.
12. The oil cooler has a restriction (Externally or Internally).
13. The temperature sending switch is not operating correctly.
14. The control valve is not operating correctly.
15. The loader is not being operated at the correct RPM.
16. The sender has a defective.
17. There is low charge pressure.
18. The charge relief has a defect.
19. Steering lever is obstructed.
553 Loader
HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM INFORMATION
A
CHARGE OIL

use caps and plugs on hoses, tubelines and Valve Moves for Charge
ports to keep dirt out. Dirt can quickly damage Oil Replacement
the system.
I–2003–0284 FUNCTION 1
Replenishing Valve Function

The functions of the replenishing valves are:
1. To give replacement fluid to the low pressure side of
the hydrostatic circuit. Replacement fluid is needed
because of normal internal leakage and the
controlled flow to the oil cooler for cooling; Function
1 [A].
2. To keep high pressure fluid out of the low pressure
side of the hydrostatic circuitry; Function 2 [A].
Valve Stays on Seat to
Hold High Pressure for Drive
FUNCTION 2
B–2804
553 Loader
CONTROL PANEL
A

the machine to fall or move and cause injury or 2
death.
W–2017–0286
P–5929
B
2
Remove the engine speed control. (See Page 7–1.)
Loosen the jam nut on the bypass control knob (Item 1)
[A].
Remove the control knob (Item 1) [A], jam nut and rubber
washer (Item 2) [A]. 1
NOTE: Mark the position of the cable clamp on the
shutoff cable so readjustment of the shutoff
control is not necessary.
Disconnect the fuel shutoff cable (Item 1) [B] from the P–5936
shutoff lever on the injection pump.
Remove the cable clamp (Item 2) [B] to release the
shutoff cable from the mounting bracket.
C 1
Remove the hand grip from each steering lever.
NOTE: Use air pressure under each grip to make

removal easier.
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [C] from each
side of the control panel. 1
Slide the panel up over the steering levers and remove it
from the loader. P–5938
NOTE: Use a small amount of liquid soap on each

rubber boot to make removal of the control
panel easier.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the control
panel.
553 Loader
STEERING LEVERS
A

death. 1
W–2017–0286
P–5958
B
3–1.)
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [A] and nut from the
steering linkage (both sides) to disconnect the linkage
from the steering levers.
Disconnect the auxiliary control linkage (Item 1) [B] from
the right steering lever. 1
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 80–90 in.–lbs. P–5983
(9–10 Nm) torque.
Remove the right side steering shaft bearing (Item 1) [C]. C
Installation: Tighten the two (2) bearing mounting bolts
to 180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque. Use the grease
fitting (Item 2) [C] to lubricate the bearing. 2
P–5939
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts from the left side
steering shaft bearing (Item 1) [D]. D
Installation: Tighten the two (2) bearing mounting bolts 2
to 180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque. Use the grease 1
fitting (Item 2) [D] to lubricate the bearing.
Remove the steering levers assembly from the loader.
P–5982
553 Loader
STEERING LEVERS (Cont’d)
A
Slide the left steering lever assembly off the shaft of the
right steering lever assembly [A].
2
Check the plastic bushings (Item 1) [A] for damage or
wear and replace if necessary.
Assembly: Lightly lubricate the steering shaft before
assembly.
Install the washer (Item 2) [A] on the shaft.
1
Install the two (2) plastic bushings (Item 1) [A] in each end
of the left side lever assembly. P–5987
Slide the left side steering lever assembly onto the right
side lever assembly.
553 Loader
STEERING LINKAGE
A
NOTE: The steering linkage/hydrostatic pump

assembly has been removed from the loader
to show the steering linkage removal and
installation more clearly. The steering
linkage can be removed from the loader with
the assembly installed in the loader.
1
Remove the right and left steering linkages (Item 1) [A] P–5965
from the pintle bars (Item 2) [A].
Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) [B] from the centering
spring assembly.
B
1
P–5967
Inspect the centering spring assembly (Item 1) [C] and

replace any damaged or worn parts. C Compressed
Length
Installation: When installing the centering spring, the
compressed length of the spring should be 2.4’’ (51 mm)
[C].
P–5968
Remove the two (2) high pressure hose fittings (Item 1)

[D] from the hydrostatic pumps. D
1
P–5969
553 Loader
STEERING LINKAGE (Cont’d)
A
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [A] from each
adjustment bar on the centering bar.
Remove the two (2) adjustment bars from the centering
bar.
P–5970
NOTE: Both holes (Item 1) [B] for the front pump

adjustment bar are slotted for adjustment B
purposes. Only the top hole (Item 2) [B] for 2
the rear pump is slotted. When adjusting the
steering linkage to neutral, adjust the pintle
lever on the rear pump first. See Page 3–11 for
correct steering neutral adjustment
procedure.
P–5966
Remove the centering bar (Item 1) [C] from the pintle

levers (Item 2) [C]. C
See Page 3–10 for pintle lever disassembly and
assembly if necessary.
P–5971
553 Loader
Pintle Lever Disassembly and Assembly
A
Remove the pintle lever retainer (Item 1) [A] and the two
(2) plastic washers 4
NOTE: There is only one plastic washer (which is
slotted), located on the rear hydrostatic
pump for mounting the centering bar.
Remove the pintle lever mounting bolt (Item 2) [A].
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 180–200
in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque.
2
Slide the pintle lever off the keyed shaft (Item 3) [A] of the
hydrostatic pump. 3
Check the pivot bushing (Item 4) [A] for the steering
linkage.
1
P–5976
If worn or damaged, place the pintle bar in a vice to

remove the pivot bushing for the steering linkage [B]. B
Use a 1 inch socket (Item 1) [B] and a 9/16’’ socket (Item
2) [B] (both 1/2’’ drive), and press out the pivot bushing.
P–5974
Check the pivot bushing mounting hole (Item 1) [C] for

wear or damage and replace the pintle lever if necessary. C
1
P–5977
553 Loader
Pintle Lever Disassembly and Assembly (Cont’d)
A
3
Installation: Use 7/8’’ socket (Item 1) [A] and a 3/4’’
socket (Item 2) [A] (both 1/2’’ drive), to press a new pivot
bushing into the pintle lever. 1
The lobes (Item 3) [A] may also become worn or damged.
2
P–5973
Place the pintle lever in a vise as shown [B].
Remove the lobe mounting bolts (Item 1) [B]. B
Installation: Install new lobes in the pintle lever and 1
tighten the mounting bolts to 180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23
Nm) torque.
Steering Neutral Adjustment

P–5972
C
2

death.
W–2017–0286
Raise the loader and install an approved lift arm support

device. (See Page 1–1..) 1
P–5966
Connect the remote start switch (MEL1429). (See Page
1–1.)
D
1
NOTE: Both holes (Item 1) [C] for the front pump
adjustment bar are slotted for the steering
neutral adjustment procedure. Only the top
hole (Item 2) [C] for the rear pump adjustment
bar is slotted for the steering neutral
adjustment procedure. Begin the steering
neutral adjustment procedure with the rear
pump.
Loosen the pivot bolt (Item 1) [D] on the rear pump pintle
lever to eliminate any tension between the lever and the
steering linkage.
P–7092
553 Loader
Steering Neutral Adjustment (Cont’d)
A
Loosen the pivot bolt (Item 1) [A] on the left side steering
lever to eliminate any tension between steering linkage
and the steering lever.
Use the remote start switch and start the engine, move
the engine speed control to low idle.
1
P–7096
Loosen the two mounting bolts (Item 1) [B] on the

adustment bar for the rear pump pintle lever. B
Move the left steering lever until the left side tires do not
move (neutral position).
1
P–7095
Move the adjustment bar (Item 1) [C] so it touches the

bottom and top lobe (Item 2) [C] of the pintle lever at the
same time. C
Be sure the wheels do not turn and stay in the neutral
position.
2
Tighten the adjustment bar mounting bolts to 25–28 1
Test the left steering lever by moving the lever forward
and backward. Let the steering lever return to the neutral
position.
If the wheels do not stop turning in neutral position,
readjust the adjustment bar against the lobes of the pintle
lever. P–7097
Repeat the procedure until the wheels stop turning

(neutral position) and the steering lever is in the neutral
position.
After the left side linkage is complete, tighten the pivot
bolts on the pintle lever and steering lever linkages.
Tighten the locknuts on each linkage to 25–28 ft.–lbs.
Repeat the complete procedure for the right side steering
linkage.
553 Loader
HYDR0STATIC PUMP
A
Checking Charge Pressure
The tools listed are needed to complete the following
procedure:
MEL1173 – Test Kit
1

corners of the frame before running the engine P–5957
death.
W–2017–0286 B
Connect the remote start switch to the loader. (See Page
1–1.)
Disconnect the wires from the charge pressure switch
(Item 1) [A] located on the inlet tubeline of the front
hydrostatic pump.
Remove the charge pressure switch (Item 1) [A] from the
from the inlet fitting. P–7253
Connect a pressure gauge to the fitting where the switch

was removed [B]. C 2
Start the engine and increase the speed to 2500 RPM.
The charge pressure should be 45–65 PSI (310–448
kPa). This is the minimum acceptable level without any
use of the hydraulic/hydrostatic functions.
If the pressure is not correct, check the charge pressure
bypass valve (Item 1) [C] located in the port block (Item 1
2) [C].
Remove the charge pressure bypass valve. (See Page
3–1.)
Inspect and clean the bypass valve or install a new P–5954
bypass valve in the port block. Repeat the charge
pressure test.
If the test still shows the incorrect pressure, refer to the
troubleshooting chart. (See Page 3–3.) Other problems
may exist that are causing the charge pressure to be
incorrect.
553 Loader
HYDROSTATIC PUMP (Cont’d)
A
1 2

hydraulic systems, clean the work area before 3
I–2003–0284
3–5.)
Drain the hydraulic fluid from the reservoir. (See Page
1–1.) 2
1
Disconnect the two (2) charge inlet hoses (Items 1 & 2)
[A] from the hydrostatic pump assembly.
P–5957
Disconnect the wires from the charge pressure switch
(Item 3) [A].
Make note of the wire colors and location. C
Remove the inlet hose (Item 1) [B] from the hydraulic
pump.
Remove the outlet hose (Item 2) [B] from the hydraulic 2
pump.
Disconnect the steering linkage bars (Items 1 & 2) [C] 1
from the steering levers.
P–5958
Disconnect the two (2) high pressure hoses (Items 1 & 2)

[D] from the front and rear (right side) hydrostatic pumps. D
Be sure to mark each hose for correct installation.
2
P–5952
553 Loader
A
Disconnect the two (2) high pressure hoses (Items 1 & 2)
[A] from the front and rear (left side) hydrostatic pumps.
Be sure to mark each hose for correct installation.
1 2
P–5959
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] washers, and nut
from the left side of the hydrostatic pump mount.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 65–70 ft.–lbs.
B
P–5960
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [C] washers, and nut
from the right side of the hydrostatic pump mount.
C
P–5961
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts (Item 1) [D] from the
rear pump and pump assembly mounting plate.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 25–28 ft.–lbs. D
(34–38 Nm) torque. 1
P–5962
553 Loader
A
Install a chain hoist securely around the hydrostatic pump 1
assembly.
Slide the pump drive coupler (Item 1) [A] out of the u–joint
drive coupler (Item 2) [A].
Installation: Grease the pump drive coupler and the
inside of the u–joint coupler for easier installation. 2

Reverse the removal procedure to install the hydrostatic
pump assembly in the loader. P–5964
If the rear pump mount (Item 1) [B] is removed, be sure

to note the location and amount of shim washers (Item 1)
[C] between the pump mount and the loader frame on
B
each side of the pump mount.
P–5963
NOTE: A total of four (4) shim washers (Item 1) [C]

can be used per side on the rear pump mount C
to align the splined shaft of the hydrostatic
pump with the u–joint coupler on the engine.
Refer to the loader parts manual for the
correct shim part number and specifications.
1 1
P–7075
553 Loader
Drive Coupler Removal and Installation
A
(See Page 3–14.)
The drive coupler (Item 1) [A] is located on the shaft of the
rear hydrostatic pump.
P–5975
Remove the drive coupler mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] and

washer (Item 2) [B] from the hydrostatic pump shaft. Be
B
careful to not damage the splines on the coupler.
Installation: Apply (LOCTITE #242) adhesive to the 3
drive coupler mounting bolt, tighten the mounting bolt to
25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–37 Nm) torque.
2
Remove the drive coupler (Item 3) [B] from the keyed
pump shaft. 1
Inspect the key (Item 4) [B] for wear or damage and

replace if necessary. 4
Reverse the removal procedure to install the drive
coupler. P–5978
553 Loader
REAR FRONT
Drive End Hydraulic Pump End
37
37 18
18 16
16 10 11 17
10 11 17 12
12 13 36
13 15 14
14
35
8 21 22
21 54
54 22
56
6 10
5 34 9 14
34 9 14 10 2 19
2 19 1 24 13
1 13 26 20
24 20
26 27 28
27 23
23 28 25
25 29
29
32 33
34
32 33 24
34 3031 23
24
3031 23
E–1408 E–1406
MODEL: 553
Ref. Description Ref. Description

1 RING, retaining 20 O–RING
2 SEAL 21 COVER
3 WASHER 22 COVER
4 RING, retaining 23 PLUG
5 RACE 24 O–RING
6 BEARING, thrust 25 SPRING
7 KEY 26 VALVE, relief
8 SHAFT, drive 27 PLATE, back
9 BEARING 28 BOLT
10 SCREW 29 BOLT
11 COVER 30 GASKET
12 SEAL 31 BEARING
13 WASHER 32 DOWEL
14 BEARING 33 SEAT
15 HOUSING 34 SPRING
16 KEY 35 SHAFT, drive
17 PLATE, yoke 36 HOUSING
18 ROTATING GROUP 37 PLATE, valve wear
19 BEARING
553 Loader
THE ILLUSTRATIONS MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM
A
THE HYDROSTATIC PUMP YOU ARE WORKING ON,
BUT THE PROCEDURE IS THE SAME.
procedure:
MEL1219–4 – Torx Socket
B–6057

B
the system.
I–2003–0284
NOTE: Before you begin the disassembly

procedure, remove the hydraulic pump from
the unit.
Remove the bolt and splined gear from the pump shaft
[A].
B–6058
Assembly: Tighten the bolt to 25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm)
torque.
C
Remove the charge tubeline between the two pumps [B].
Remove the two bolts which fasten the two pumps
together [C].
Nm) torque.
Separate the pumps and remove the coupler.
B–6060
Remove the plugs at the high pressure replenishing

valves [D].
D
B–8843
553 Loader
A
Remove the high pressure replenishing valves [A].
B–8844
NOTE: The hydrostatic pump front and rear pump

internal parts are the same. Keep all the parts
for one pump separated from the parts for the
B
other pump.
Remove the four bolts from the center section [B].

Nm) torque.
B–6062
Remove the center section [C]. C
B–6063
Remove the rotating group [D]. D

Put your hand under the rotating group and turn the pump
housing around so the rotating group will slide into your
hand.
B–6064
553 Loader
A
Remove the snap ring from the rear housing [A].
Hit the shaft on a block of wood to remove the bearing and
shaft [A].
B–6072
B–6071
Remove the seal and backup washer from the shaft [B]. B
B–6073
Remove the bolts at the cover of the long pintle shaft [C].
C
Remove the pintle cover.
B–6065
Remove the seal and washer [D].

D
B–6067
553 Loader
A
Remove the pintle shaft bearing [A].
Assembly: When installing the bearing, make sure the
numbered side of the bearing is toward the outside.
B–6066
Remove the screws and cover from the short pintle shaft
[B].
B
B–6068
Remove the washer and O–ring from the shaft [C].

C
B–6069
Remove the bearing and bearing race from the shaft [D].
D
Assembly: When installing the race, make sure that the
chamfer side of the race is toward the cam plate.
B–6070
553 Loader
A
Remove the cam plate from the housing [A].
B–6074
Inspection B
NOTE: Keep all the parts for one pump separated
from the parts for the other pump.
Clean all the parts in solvent and use air pressure to dry
them. DO NOT use cloth or paper because small pieces
of material can get into the system and cause damage.
Inspect the input drive shafts, bearings and races for wear
and damage to the shaft splines [B] & [C].
The bearings in the center section and housing, only have
to be removed if they are loose and show wear. Use a
press to remove and replace the bearings.
B–8859
B–6075
Inspect the flat surface of the sections. The finish must be

smooth and free of grooves. If the grooves can be felt on D
the finished surfaced with a fingernail, replace the part
[D].
NOTE: Newer model 553 loaders have a replaceable

wear plate (not shown). See Parts
Identification Page 3–18 for serial number
reference.
B–6076
553 Loader
Inpection (Cont’d)
A
Inspect the camplate for wear. The finish must be smooth
and free of grooves. If the grooves can be felt with a
fingernail, replace the camplate [A].
B–6079
Inspect the rotating group as follows:

Check each piston in its bore. The piston must move
B
freely.
Check the pins for wear or damage [B].
All the pins must be the same length and must not be bent.
Check the spherical washer for sharp edges, wear or
scratches [B].
B–8860
Check the piston shoe for scratches [C].

C
B–6077
Check the end play of each piston assembly [D]. Measure

the thickness of each shoe. All shoes must be within
0.001’’ (0,025 mm) of each other [D]. D This Dimension Must be Maintained on All
Nine Shoes Within 0.001’’ (0,0254 mm)
Piston
Shoe
Shoe Must Swivel
Smoothly on Ball
End Play Must Not
Exceed .003’’ (0,076 mm)
A–1850
553 Loader
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–HydrostaticSystemSectionPart1of2
A
Inspection (Cont’d)
Check the flat surface of the piston block for being smooth
and free of scratches [A].
Inspect the shoe plate for wear or cracks. If there is any
defect in the rotating group, the complete unit must be
replaced.
DO NOT use sandpaper or a file to remove scratches.
NOTE: Always use new O–rings, gaskets and seals

when assembling the hydrostatic pumps.
B–6078
553 Loader
PORT BLOCK
A 4
Drain the hydraulic fluid from the reservoir. (See Page

1–1.)
Disconnect the two (2) hydrostatic motor case drain 3
hoses (Item 1) [A] from the tee fitting on the port block.
Disconnect the charge inlet hose (Item 2) [A] from the 5
port block.
Disconnect the wire (Item 3) [A] from the hydraulic fluid 2
temperature switch. 1
P–5954
Disconnect the inlet and oulet hoses (Item1) [B] from the
port block. B 2
Disconnect the return tubeline (Item 2) [B] from the port
block.
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 3) [B] from the port block
and remove the port block from the loader.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the port block in
the loader.
Oil Cooler Bypass Valve
3
The oil cooler bypass valve is located in the return 1

tubeline port (Item 2) [B] of the port block.
P–5945
Disconnect the tubeline and remove the fitting from the
port.
Check the poppet and spring for damage or wear and
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Switch
To replace the hydraulic oil temperature switch (Item 4)
[A], disconnect the wire (Item 3) [A] from the switch and
remove the switch from the port block.
Charge Pressure Bypass Valve
The charge pressure bypass valve (Item 5) [A] is located
under the hydraulic oil temperature switch in the port
block.
Remove the hydraulic oil temperature switch (Item 4) [A]
to access the charge pressure bypass valve.
Remove the plug (Item 5) [A] from the port block.
Check the spring and poppet for damage or wear and
Replace the O–ring on the plug.
553 Loader
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE MOTOR
A

hydraulic systems, clean the work area before 1
I–2003–0284
B 1
Remove the front and rear wheels from the side which the
motor is located. (See Page 1–1.)
Remove the control panel. (See Page 3–1.)
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [A] from the
motor cover (Item 2) [A] and remove the cover from the
loader.
P–5993
Installation: Tighten the motor cover mounting bolts to
25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
Mark the two (2) drive hoses (Item 1) [B] to ensure correct C
installation.
Disconnect the two (2) drive hoses (Item 1) [B] from the
hydrostatic motor.
Disconnect the case drain hose (Item 1) [C] from the drive
motor.
1
P–5991
Use coated electrical wire to support the sprocket, chains

and brake disc [D]. D
The wire will keep the assembly from falling down and will
also make drive motor installation easier.
P–7001
553 Loader
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE MOTOR (Cont’d)
A
1
drive motor.
P–5997
Remove the drive motor from the loader [B]. B

Reverse the removal procedure to install the drive motor
in the loader.
P–5999
553 Loader
MODEL: 109–1269–006 4 11
Splined Shaft 9 3
5 10
6 7 8
5
3 12
1
13
4
21 2
20 19
14
15
16 24
18 17
24
23 22
22 26
25
30 22
28 27
29
34
33
31 32
D–1678
MODEL: 553
Ref. Description Ref. Description

1 PLUG 19 PLATE, balancing
2 O–RING 20 VALVE
3 SHUTTLE 21 PLATE, valve
4 SPRING 22 O–RING
5 POPPET 23 SHAFT
6 PLUG 24 O–RING
7 O–RING 25 GEROLER
8 HOUSING 26 SHAFT
9 PISTON 27 HOUSING, bearing
10 O–RING 28 SEAL
11 PLUG 29 SHAFT & BEARING
12 BOLT 30 SEAL, shaft
13 BOLT 31 SEAL, dust
14 O–RING 32 BOLT
15 SPRING 33 WASHER
16 O–RING 34 COVER, front
17 SEAL, outer
18 SEAL, inner
553 Loader
THE ILLUSTRATIONS MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM
A
THE MOTOR THAT YOU ARE WORKING ON, BUT
THE PROCEDURE IS THE SAME.
procedure:
MEL1187 – Socket
MEL1015 – Seal Tool
B–5117

B
the system.
I–2003–0284
NOTE: Before you begin to disassemble the motor, Shaft

use a puller and remove the sprocket from
the tapered shaft.
Put a mark across the motor sections for correct B–5118

assembly [A].
Remove the four bolts from the motor [B].
C
Assembly: Tighten the bolts to 50 ft.–lbs. (68 Nm)
torque.
Lift the valve housing straight up [C]. If done carefully, the
springs and balance plate will stay on the valve.
NOTE: See Page 3–38 for the correct installation of

the housing and the balance plate.
B–5120
Remove the large and small O–rings [D].

D
B–5126
553 Loader
A
Remove the plug at the valve housing [A].
B–5127
Remove the spring, shuttle and poppet [B]. B
B–5128
Use a punch, remove the poppet, spring, O–ring, shuttle

and plug [C]. C
B–5129
Remove the two springs from the balance plate [D].

D
B–5124
553 Loader
A
Remove the inner seal from the balance plate [A].
Assembly: Put grease on the inner seal and install as
shown [A].
Balance
Plate Outer
Outer Seal
Seal
Pin B–8733
Inner Seal Pin B–3046
Remove the outer seal from the balance plate [B]. B

Assembly: Put grease on the outer seal and install as
shown [B].
NOTE: See Page 3–38 for timing the motor when
installing the valve, valve drive and geroler.
Balance Outer
Outer Plate Seal
Seal
Pin B–8732
Inner Seal Pin B–3046
Remove the valve [C].

C
Shaft
B–5134
Remove the valve plate [D].

D
Shaft
B–5123
553 Loader
A
Remove the valve drive [A].
Shaft
B–5122
Remove the geroler [B]. B

Make sure the rollers are kept in the geroler.
Shaft
B–5121
Remove the drive shaft [C].

C
Shaft
B–5119
Remove the O–rings (large and small) from the bearing

housing [D]. D
B–5125
553 Loader
A
Remove the eight (8) bolts at the bearing housing [A].
Assembly: Tighten the bolts to 20 ft.–lbs. (27 Nm)
torque.
B–3042R
Shaft
B–5132
Remove the mounting flange from the housing [B]. B
Shaft
B–5133
Use a press, remove the shaft and bearing assembly [C].

C
NOTE: If there is any wear or damage to the shaft or
bearing assembly, you must replace the
complete unit.
Shaft
B–5135
Remove the seal from the bearing housing [D].

D
B–5140
553 Loader
A
Assembly: Put the bearing housing on a smooth surface
with the largest opening up [A]. Take the largest diameter
half of the seal tool and lubricate the inside.
Install the seal tool into the bearing housing [A].
Install the shaft face seal (with the inside edge up) into the
seal tool.
B–5138
Install the small diameter of the seal tool and push the
seal into position [B].
B
B–5137
Press the shaft and bearing assembly into the bearing

housing [C]. C Shaft
Be careful not to damage the shaft seal. Turn the shaft
several times to make sure that the shaft turns freely.
B–5136
MODEL: 109–1052–005
D
Remove the backup washer and seal from the mounting
flange [D].
Assembly: Use the correct size seal driver tool and install
the backup washer.
B–5142
B–5141
553 Loader
A
MODEL: 109–1052–006 & Above
Remove the dust seal from the mounting flange [A].
B–6769
Remove the shaft seal and brass backup ring [B]. B
B–6768
Assembly: Use the correct size seal driver tool and install
the shaft seal the dust seal [C] & [D]. C
NOTE: Always use new O–rings, gaskets and seals
when assembling the hydrostatic motor.
B–6770
B–6771
553 Loader
Inspection
A
Clean all the parts in solvent and use air pressure to dry
them. DO NOT use cloth or paper because small pieces
of material can get into the system and cause damage.
Before the motor is assembled, check the following items:
Check the geroler roller and rotor for wear and scratches
[A]. B–6392
NOTE: Put all the rollers back in their position.
B–6394
Check the valve plate for scratches [B].

B
B–6390
B–6391
Check the balance plate for scratches [C].

C
Check the valve drive and main drive for wear.
B–6389
Check the end plate surface for scratches [D]. D
B–6388
553 Loader
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–HydrostaticSystemSectionPart2of2
A
Inspection (Cont’d)
Assembly: When installing the balance plate in the end
housing, put your finger through the hole and hold it in
position until the housing is in position [A].
B–8690
Timing the Hydrostatic Motor

The timing of the motor controls the direction of rotation
of the drive shaft of the motor. The timing parts are as
follows:
1. Geroler (Item 1) [B]. Rotate Valve Clockwise
B 1/2 Tooth to Engage Spline
2. Valve Drive (Item 2) [B].
Anyone of 6 Ports
3. Valve Plate (Item 3) [B]. Open to Outside of Valve 4
4. Valve (Item 4) [B]. Largest Opening

Valve
Find the largest opening between the geroler star and the
geroler ring and mark the outside of the geroler ring at that
point [B].
Align the two drain holes and the three pressure holes in
the geroler ring with the same holes in the mounting
flange and install the geroler assembly.
Case Drain
Install new O–rings. Hole (2)
Install the valve drive [B]. Valve Plate
Align the drain hole in the valve plate with the drain hole 2
in the geroler. Install the valve plate with the O–ring 3
toward the geroler. Make sure the slot opening of the
valve plate is in alignment with the largest opening of the Valve Drive
geroler. 1
Pressure
Install the valve plate [B]. Relief Hole (3)
Install the valve on the valve plate. Make alignment with Geroler
one of the side openings with the mark on the geroler. Ring
Geroler
Turn the valve clockwise a small amount until the teeth Star
on the valve drive engage.
Continue with the rest of the assembly procedure. C–2384
553 Loader
DRIVE SYSTEM
Page
Number
AXLE SEAL
AXLE, BEARINGS, AND SPROCKET

CHAINCASE COVERS
Front Cover Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
Rear Cover Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
CHAINCASE FLUID
Removing Oil From the Chaincase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
DRIVE
DRIVE CHAIN SYSTEM
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
PARKING BRAKE
PARKING BRAKE DISC

Brake Disc Guide Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
553 Loader
PARKING BRAKE
A
Raise the loader lift arms and install an approved lift arm
support device. (See Page 1–1.)
Remove the control panel. (See Page 3–1.) 1
brake pedal mounting bracket.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 25–28 ft.–lbs. P–5925
Disconnect the brake switch connector (Item 1) [B] from
the BICS™ harness.
B
1
Remove the parking brake assembly from the loader.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the parking
brake assembly in the loader.
P–5988

Loosen and remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [C] and nut
C 5
from the spring mounting bracket (Item 2) [C].
6
Remove the brake pedal spring (Item 3) [C] from the
spring mounting bracket (Item 2) [C] and from the brake
pedal mounting bracket (Item 4) [C].
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts, washers, and nuts
(Item 5) [C] from the brake pedal sensor. 1
4
Remove the harness mounting clamp (Item 1) [D] from
the pedal mounting bracket (Item 4) [C].
Remove the sensor harness from the pedal mounting 2
3
bracket. P–4189
Remove the pedal mounting bolt (Item 6) [C], plastic

spacers, and bushing nut from the brake pedal.
D
Remove the pedal from the pedal mounting bracket. 1
Photo [D] shows the parking brake disassembled to

identify the existing parts of the brake assembly.
P–4156
553 Loader
PARKING BRAKE DISC
A
Removal And Installation
Lift and block the loader. (See Page 1–1.) 1
Raise the loader operator cab. (See Page 1–1.)
1
3–1.)
Remove the traction lock assembly. (See Page 8–1.) P–05998
Remove the rear chaincase cover. (See Page 4–6.)

Inspect the parking brake disc guides for damage or wear
B
1
and replace if necessary.
NOTE: Refer to Page 4–5 for the correct removal
procedure of the brake disc guides mounted
to the rear chaincase cover.
The two parking brake discs (Item 1) [A] are located

under the rear chaincase cover.
A snap ring pliers with 90° tips are necessary to remove
the parking brake disc.
Remove the snap ring (Item 1) [B] from the end of the P–05996
cluster sprocket on the hydrostatic motor.
C
Slide the brake disc (Item 1) [C] off the cluster sprocket 1
and remove the brake disc.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the parking
brake disc in the loader.
P–05992
553 Loader
PARKING BRAKE DISC (Cont’d)
A
Brake Disc Guide Removal And Installation
Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 1) [A] from each
brake disc guide (Item 2) [A].
Remove the two disc guides. 3 2
Installation: Put liquid adhesive (LOCTITE #242) on the
threads of the disc guide mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts
1
P–05985
Turn the chaincase cover over and remove the two

mounting bolts (Item 1) [B] from each disc guide
mounting block (Item 3) [A].
B
Remove the disc guide mounting blocks from the
chaincase cover.
Installation: Put a bead of polyurethane caulk around
each mounting hole between the chaincase cover and the
disc guide mounting block. Put liquid adhesive (LOCTITE 1
#242) on the threads of the disc guide mounting bolts.
Tighten to 65–70 ft.–lbs. (88–95 Nm) torque.
Inspect the disc guides and mounting blocks for damage
or wear and replace if necessary.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the brake disc P–05986
guides.
553 Loader
CHAINCASE FLUID
A
Removing Oil From the Chaincase
To drain the oil from the chaincase, remove the plug (Item
1) [A] located in the front of the chaincase.
P–5822
Use a transfer pump as shown [B] and remove the oil

from the chaincase into a container. B
Installation: Add oil to the chaincase in the same location
as shown in [B]. (See Page 9–1 for specifications.)
NOTE: An alternate method to remove or add oil to

the chaincase would be through the front or
rear chaincase cover.
P–5823
CHAINCASE COVERS
Front Cover Removal and Installation C
Remove the parking brake from the front cover (Item 1)
[C]. (See Page 4–3.) 1
Remove the eight (8) mounting bolts (Item 2) [C] from the
front cover.
Installation: Apply liquid adhesive (LOCTITE #242) to
each mounting bolt and tighten the bolts to 190–240 2
Remove the gasket from the chaincase and inspect for
damage. Replace if necessary. P–5995
Rear Cover Removal and Installation D

Remove the traction lock assembly from the rear cover
(Item 1) [D]. (See Page 8–1.)
Remove the ten (10) mounting bolts (Item 2) [D] from the 1
rear cover.
Installation: Apply liquid adhesive (LOCTITE #242) to 2
each mounting bolt and tighten the mounting bolts to
190–240 in.–lbs. ( 22–27 Nm) torque.
Remove the gasket from the chaincase and inspect for
damage. Replace if necessary. P–5989
553 Loader
AXLE SEAL
A
The tools listed are needed for the following procedure: 2
Axle Hub Puller Tool
Slide Hammer
MEL1469 – Seal Driver Tool
MEL1242 – Power Ram (may be used if desired)
NOTE: The front axle seal is shown in this 1
procedure. This procedure is the same for
the rear axle.
To loosen the axle hub mounting bolt (Item 1) [A], use the 2
following procedure: P–7002
Before lifting and blocking the loader, loosen the hub

mounting bolt (Item 1) [A]. B
NOTE: If the axle and bearings are being replaced,
loosen the sprocket mounting bolt inside the
chaincase before lifting and blocking the 1
loader (See Page 4–9). 2
Remove the front wheel from the loader.
Installation: Tighten the wheel mounting nuts to
105–115 ft.–lbs. (142–156 Nm) torque.
Remove the axle hub mounting bolt (Item 1) [A] and
washer from the axle. P–7003
Installation: Tighten the axle hub mounting bolt to

575–625 ft.–lbs. (780–845 Nm) torque.
Remove two (2) of the wheel mounting studs (Item 2) [A]
(180° opposite from each other).
Use a wheel mounting nut on each stud and remove the
two (2) studs with a hammer.
Installation: Support the flange of the axle hub and install
the two (2) studs with a hammer. Use a hydraulic press
for this procedure if available.
Install the puller tool (Item 1) [B] on the axle hub.
Use a driver tool (Item 2) [B] to center the threaded rod
of the puller on the axle.
NEVER STAND IN–LINE OF THE HUB WHEN

REMOVING A HUB FROM AN AXLE. The hub
has a tapered fit on the axle end and can come
off the axle with great force and cause serious
injury.
Use a wrench on the threaded rod of the puller and

remove the axle hub from the axle.
553 Loader
AXLE SEAL (Cont’d)
A
Remove the key (Item 1) [A] from the axle.
P–7000
Drill a small hole in the axle seal [B]. B

Install a slide hammer (Item 1) [B] with a screw tip end in
the drilled hole on the seal.
NOTE: More than one (1) hole may need to be drilled
in the seal before the seal can be removed
from the axle tube.
Remove the axle seal.
1
P–7004
Installation: MEL1469 seal driver tool is necessary for

the installation procedure. C
Clean the seal area and inspect the shaft for wear.
NOTE: If the shaft is damaged or worn, an axle repair
sleeve kit is available from Melroe Parts Sales
in Chicago.
Put the new axle seal over the axle and into the axle tube.
Install MEL1469 seal driver tool over the end of the axle
and against the seal [C].
Hit the seal driver tool with a hammer [C].
P–7007
Drive the seal (Item 1) [D] into the axle tube until the seal
tool is against the axle tube. D 1
If installed correctly, the axle seal is slightly recessed from
the edge of the axle tube after installation is complete.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the axle hub and
wheel on the loader.
P–7015
553 Loader
AXLE, BEARINGS, AND SPROCKET
A
The tools listed are needed for the following procedure:
MEL1242 – Power Ram
MEL1202B – Axle Bearing Service Set
NOTE: The procedure shown is for removing the

front axle, bearings, and sprocket. This
procedure can also be used to remove the
rear axle, sprocket, and bearings from the 1
loader.
Use jackstands to support the rear of the loader (the P–5995

loader wheels should remain on the ground).
Remove the front chaincase cover (Item 1) [A] from the
loader. (See Page 4–6.)
Remove the axle sprocket mounting bolt (Item 1) [B].
Installation: Apply liquid adhesive (LOCTITE #242) to 1
the axle sprocket mounting bolt and tighten to 220–245
P–7006
Remove the fluid from the chaincase. (See Page 4–6.)
C
Remove the axle hub. (See Page 4–7.)
Install the MEL1242 Power Ram (Item 1) [C] between the
sprockets as shown.
Install a spacer (the same diameter as the end of the axle 1
shaft), between the power ram and the axle shaft [C].
Push the axle out until the power ram is tight against the
sprocket. Add a thicker spacer and push the axle again.
Repeat the procedure until the axle is free from the
sprocket and inner bearing.
P–7005
Remove the drive chain from the sprocket (Item 1) [D]

and remove the sprocket from the chaincase. D
Remove the inner bearing (Item 2) [D] and remove the 2
axle from the axle tube. (See Page 4–10 for outer bearing 1
removal from the axle.)
Installation: Grease both axle bearings before installing
them.
P–7011
553 Loader
AXLE, BEARINGS, AND SPROCKET (Cont’d)
A
A bearing puller (Item 1) [A] is needed for the following 1
procedure:
Put the axle/outer bearing assembly in the bearing puller
as shown and put in the hydraulic press [A].
Be sure the bearing puller makes good contact with the
inner race of the bearing and press the bearing off the
mounting surface of the axle.
Be sure to hold onto the axle during removal as it will slide
freely along the axle shaft after removal from the bearing
mounting surface and until the bearing contacts the spline P–4170
on the shaft.
Press the splined end of the axle free from the bearing
[B].
B
P–4171
Installation: A piece of round tube (Item 1) [C] is needed

to install the bearing on the axle shaft. The tube needs to C
measure approximately 1/2 inch (12,7 mm) to 1 inch (25,4 4
mm) in length. The inside diameter of the tube should not 3
be under 1.8 inches (45,7 mm) and the outside diameter
should not be over 2.1 inches (50,3 mm),
A bearing puller (Item 2) [C] is also needed to install the 1
bearing on the axle.
Put the tube (Item 1) [C] on the bearing puller (Item 2) [C].
Put the bearing (Item 3) [C] on the tube as shown. 2
Put the spline end of the axle shaft (Item 4) [C] in the
bearing and press the bearing onto the axle. P–4169
Be sure to hold onto the axle during installation. It will slide

freely along the axle shaft after the spline end has passed
through the bearing and until it reaches the bearing D
mounting surface on the axle.
When the bearing reaches the bearing mounting surface,
continue the installation until the bearing is fully seated
[D].
P–4175
553 Loader
AXLE, BEARINGS, AND SPROCKET (Cont’d)
A
Use the tools provided in the MEL1202B Axle Bearing
Service Set for bearing cup removal and installation. A
slide hammer is also necessary for this procedure.
Use the long rod and bearing cup tool to remove the inner
bearing cup [A].
Hit the long rod with a hammer to remove the bearing cup
from the axle tube [A].
P–7009
To remove the outer bearing cup, put the bearing cup tool
(Item 1) [B] on the slide hammer. B
Leave the bearing cup tool loose until the tool is installed
inside the tube [B].
After the bearing cup tool is inside the axle tube, pull the
tool against the bearing cup and tighten the nut (Item 2)
[B] on the tool.
1
2
P–7008
Use the slide hammer and remove the bearing cup from
the axle tube [C]. C
P–7012
553 Loader
AXLE, BEARING, AND SPROCKET (Cont’d)
A
1
Use the bearing cup installation tools (Item 1) [A] and
(Item 1) [B] and the long threaded rod (Item 2) [B] from
the service set to install the inner and outer bearing cups.
Put the inner bearing cup in the axle tube (Item 2) [A].
Put the installation tool (Item 1) [A] in the axle tube.
Install the long threaded rod (Item 2) [B] into the axle tube 3
and through the installation tool (Item 1) [A]. 2
Secure the tool to the threaded rod with a nut (Item 3) [A].
P–7014
Put the installation tool (Item 1) [B] in the axle tube with
the threaded rod through the hole in the tool.
Secure the tool to the threaded rod with a nut [B].
B
Hold the inside nut (Item 3) [A] with a wrench and tighten
the outside nut as shown in photo [B].
Tighten the nut until the bearing cup is seated.
P–7013
To install the outer bearing cup, use the short rod and the
bearing cup tool used for removing the bearing cups. C
Put the bearing cup tool on the short rod.
Put the bearing cup in the axle tube and put the tool into
the tube over the bearing cup [C].
Hit the short rod with a hammer until the bearing cup is
seated inside the axle tube.
P–7010
553 Loader
DRIVE CHAIN
A
Removal
2 1
Drain the fluid from the chaincase. (See Page 4–6.)
P–7011
Remove the traction lock assembly. (See Page 8–1.)
Remove the front and rear chaincase covers. (See Page
4–6.)
B
1
Remove the front axle (Item 1) [A] and sprocket (Item 2)
[A]. (See Page 4–9.)
NOTE: Only the front axle and sprocket need to be
removed to replace the front drive chain.
When replacing the rear drive chain, remove
both front and rear axles and sprockets.
Remove the parking brake disc (Item 1) [B]. (See Page

4–4.)
Remove the front (or rear) drive chain from the chaincase.
P–5992
The tool listed is needed for the following procedure:
MEL1037 – Chain Link Tool C
Installation: If an old chain is repaired, a connector link
must be used to connect the chain together.
Use MEL1037 Chain Link Tool and #80 chain adapter.
Secure the tool and put the connector link in the tool as
shown [C].
Turn the threaded rod of the tool and press the connector
link together on the chain [C]. Tighten the threaded rod of
the chain link tool to 180 ft.–lbs. (244 Nm) torque.
B–13504
553 Loader
MAIN FRAME
Page
Number
BOB–TACH
Bob–Tach Lever and Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
FUEL TANK
Fuel Level Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–20
LIFT ARMS
OPERATOR CAB
OPERATOR CAB GAS CYLINDER

MAIN
OPERATOR SEAT FRAME
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
REAR DOOR
Door Handle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–22
REAR GRILL
SEAT BAR
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
Compressing the Gas Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6

553 Loader
SEAT BAR
A
The tool listed is needed for the following procedure:
MEL1426 – Gas Spring Retainer Tool 2
Lower the operator seat bar.

Install the gas spring retainer tool on the gas cylinder
(Item 1) [A].
P–3978
Install the end of the tool that is bent at a 90° angle in the
clevis of the cylinder as shown [B].
Install the curved end of the tool on the base end of the
B
gas cylinder.
Secure the tool to the gas cylinder with a hose clamp
(Item 2) [A]. 1
Remove the retaining pin (Item 1) [B] from the clevis pin.
P–3248
Remove the clevis pin (Item 1) [C] from the gas cylinder.
C
1
Use a 17/32 inch tappet wrench (thin wrench) (Item 1) [D]

to hold the ball joint on the gas cylinder.
Remove the mounting nut from the ball joint [D].
Installation: Be careful not to overtighten the mounting P–3979
nut on the ball joint.
Remove the gas cylinder from the seat bar.
D
Cylinder contains high pressure gas. Do not

open. Opening cylinder can release rod and
cause injury or death.
W–2113–0288 1
Replace the gas cylinder if it malfunctions.

P–3249
553 Loader
SEAT BAR (Cont’d)
A
Disconnect the seat bar sensor connector (Item 1) [A].
P–4702
Remove the seat bar mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] (both

sides). B
Installation: Tighten the seat bar mounting bolts to
25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
Remove the seat bar sensor mounting bolt (Item 2) [B] 1
and nut.
Installation: Tighten the sensor mounting bolt to 80–90
Remove the sensor assembly from the magnetic bushing
on the seat bar.
2
P–3246
Installation: Be sure the two tabs on the pivot bushing

(Item 1) [C] are located in the slot on the cab as shown.
C
P–3247
Pull both ends of the seat bar which are mounted to the
operator cab, back from the mounting positions on the D
operator cab [D].
Remove the magnetic bushing mounting bolt, washer,
magnetic bushing, plastic bushing and pivot bushing from
the seat bar [D]. Refer to Page 8–1 for correct assembly
procedure of the seat bar sensor assembly.
Remove the mounting bolt, gas cylinder mounting
bracket, plastic bushing and pivot bushing from the seat
bar [D]. Refer to Page 5–7 for correct assembly
procedure of the gas cylinder mounting assembly.
P–3982 P–3983
553 Loader
SEAT BAR (Cont’d)
A
To remove the seat bar from the operator cab, the seat bar
needs to be put in the correct location.
Use the squares in the right side of the operator cab side
screen to locate the seat bar correctly [A].
Put the padded corner of the seat bar five squares back
from the front of the operator cab side screen and four
squares up from the bottom of the screen [A].
P–7252
The arm of the seat bar (Item 1) [B] should also be located
outside of the operator cab, just below the bottom edge
of the cab.
B
Grab both ends of the seat bar and pull the left side of the
seat bar (Item 1) [B] out of the operator cab until the seat
bar is free.
Remove the seat bar from the operator cab.
Reverse removal procedure to install the seat bar.
See the following assembly procedure when installing the 1
seat bar.
P–5920
Assembly
Assemble the parts as shown for the left side of the seat
bar pivot assembly [C].
C
Mounting Bolt – (Item 1) [C]. 7 6 3 2
Washer – (Item 2) [C].
1
Keyed Plastic Bushing – (Item 3) [C].
Magnetic Bushing Assembly – (Item 4) [C].
Sensor Bracket – (Item 5) [C].
Pivot Bushing – (Item 6) [C].
Mounting Bolt – (Item 7) [C].
Sensor Mounting Bolt – (Item 8) [C]. Left Side
8 5 4 of Seat Bar
Sensor Mounting Nut – (Item 9) [C]. 9
P–3284
553 Loader
SEAT BAR (Cont’d)
A 3 2 1
Assembly (Cont’d)
Assemble the parts as shown for the right side of the seat
bar pivot assembly [A].
Mounting Bolt – (Item 1) [A].
Pivot Bushing – (Item 2) [A].
Keyed Plastic Bushing – (Item 3) [A].
Gas Spring Mounting Bracket – (Item 4) [A] 5
Mounting Bolt – (Item 5) [A]. Right Side
4 of Seat Bar
Install the right side pivot assembly as shown. Tighten the
mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] to 180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm)
torque.
P–3289
NOTE: Be sure the bend in the gas spring bracket
faces in toward the operator when installing
the gas spring bracket. Slide the bracket all
the way forward so the front edge of the B 1
bracket fits tightly against the operator cab.
Compressing the Gas Cylinder

To compress the seat bar gas spring, it is necessary to
use the gas spring retainer tool MEL1426.
Use the following procedure to compress the gas spring.
P–3319

C
W–2113–0288
Open the rear door of the loader and install the gas spring
(Item 1 – ball stud end) in the hole located in the loader
frame [C].
NOTE: Install the ball stud threads up through the

hole and install a nut (Item 2) [C] on the ball
2 3
stud.
1
Put the clevis end of the gas cylinder on the edge of the
rear door as shown [C] and install a locking plier (Item 3)
[C] on the bottom edge of the door to keep the gas P–3285
cylinder from sliding along the edge.
Pull the door in and compress the gas cylinder [D]. D
Install the retainer tool (Item 1) [D] with the 90° bend in 1
the clevis of the rod end of the gas cylinder. Install the
curved end of the tool around the base end of the gas
spring.
Install the clamp (Item 2) [D] around the gas cylinder to
hold the retainer tool in place. Remove the nut and
remove the gas spring from the rear door.
P–3288
553 Loader
OPERATOR CAB GAS CYLINDER
A

W–2113–0288
P–5861
Remove the operator cab stop (Item 1) (both sides) [A].
NOTE: Be careful not to break the rear window when

the cab is raised after the cab stops are
removed.
B
Raise the operator cab slowly (See Page 1–1), to release
the tension on the gas cylinder (Item 1) [B].
3 2
Remove the retaining pin (Item 2) [B] from the gas
cylinder clevis pin.
Remove the retaining pin and plastic spacer (Item 3) [B]
to disconnect the base end of the gas cylinder from the
operator cab. 1
Installation: Move the cab slightly back or forth to align

the base end of the gas cylinder with the operator cab
mounting bracket, when installing the clevis pin, plastic P–5859
spacer and retaining pin [B].
Remove the retaining pin (Item 1) [C] from the clevis pin
(Item 2) [C] on the rod end of the gas cylinder.
C
Remove the clevis pin (Item 2) [C] to disconnect the rod
end of the gas cylinder from the mounting bracket (Item
3) [C].
Remove the bracket mounting bolts and replace the 1
mounting bracket (Item 3) [C] if it is worn or damaged.
Reverse the removal procedure to install a gas cylinder.
2
Remove the clevis (Item 1) and washer (Item 2) from the
end of the gas cylinder [C]. 3 P–7023
Remove the gas cylinder from the outer housing.

Installation: Install a replacement cylinder inside the D
cylinder housing.
Apply a small amount of liquid adhesive (LOCTITE #242)
on the threads of the cylinder rod [D].
Reinstall the washer and clevis on the cylinder rod [D].
P–1008
553 Loader
OPERATOR CAB
A
Block the rear of the loader. (See Page 1–1.)
1
Remove the operator cab stop (Item 1) [A] (both sides).
P–5861
Install a lifting strap on both operator cab lift handles [B]. B

Fasten the lifting strap to a chain hoist [B].
NOTE: Be careful when raising the operator cab. The

cab will tilt farther back with the cab stops
removed. If the cab is equipped with a rear
window, the window could be damaged if not
careful.
P–5870
Remove the retaining pin (Item 1) [C] clevis pin and

spacer from the gas cylinder (Item 2) [C] (both sides). C
Keep the other end of the gas cylinder fastened to the
loader and put the cylinder on the fender of the loader.
1
P–5859
553 Loader
A 1
Disconnect the operator cab harness (Item 1) [A] and
BICS™ harness (Item 2) [A].
Disconnect the operator cab ground wire from the loader
frame.
Use the chain hoist to lower the operator cab back on the
fenders of the loader frame.
2
P–5862
Install the operator cab holddown plate and nut [B] to

prevent the cab from sliding forward. It is not necessary
to tighten the nut all the way on the plate.
B
P–1518
Remove the operator cab mounting bolt (Item 1) [C] and

nut (both sides).
C
1
P–5867
Use four (4) washers with a 1’’ (25,4 mm) outside

diameter. D
Put one washer on the cab mounting bolt (Item 1) [D].
Raise the back of the cab and install the bolt/washer in the
cab mount as shown [D].
1
Install a second washer and nut (Item 2) [D] on the
mounting bolt.
Install a second lifting strap around the two rear cab
mounts.
P–5866
553 Loader
A
Fasten the lifting straps to the chain hoist [A].
Remove the holddown nut and plate from each side of the
operator cab.
Raise the operator cab off the loader frame.
Lower the cab to the floor and remove the chain hoist from
the cab.
Reverse the removal procedure and install a new
operator cab on the loader if necessary.
P–5869
553 Loader
OPERATOR SEAT
A
Use the following procedure to remove the operator seat
from the operator cab: 2
Locate the operator seat sensor (Item 1) [A] on the
bottom of the seat pan.
P–5863
Disconnect the seat sensor connector (Item 1) [B] and

remove the seat sensor assembly. (See Page 8–1.) B
Remove the three (3) seat mounting nuts (Item 2) [A] and
washers from the operator seat mounting studs.
Lower the operator cab and remove the operator seat
from the cab. 1
P–5915
NOTE: There are two spacers (Item 1) [C] located

between seat track and the seat pan on each
front mounting stud. Be sure not to lose the
C
spacers when removing the seat.
3
Remove the seat spring (Item 2) [C] from under the right
seat track when removing the operator seat.
1
1
P–3996
Installation: Install the seat spring (Item 1) [D] with the

bend of the seat spring in the position shown. D Operator
Seat
Inspect the seat adjustment track (Item 3) [C].
Seat
1 Spring
Remove the mounting bolt from each end of the track and
replace the adjustment track if necessary.
Seat
Reverse the removal procedure to install the operator Pan
seat.
MC–2043
553 Loader
BOB–TACH
A
Tilt the Bob–Tach forward, so it is parallel to the floor [A].
Put blocks (Item 1) [A] under each side of the Bob–Tach
and lower the lift arms.
Adjust the blocks thickness so the lift arms are lowered
fully and the Bob–Tach is resting securely on the blocks
[A].
1
P–5833
Remove the retainer bolt (Item 1) [B] from the tilt cylinder
pivot pin.
B
1
Installation: Tighten the retainer bolt to 18–20 ft.–lbs.
P–5830
Remove the pivot pin (Item 1) [C] from the tilt cylinder as
shown. To prevent possible damage to the grease fitting C 1
in the pivot pin, do not remove the pivot pin from the side
shown in [D].
P–5827
Installation: Install the pivot pin (Item 1) [D] as shown.

To prevent possible damage to the grease fitting in the D 1
pivot pin, do not install the pivot pin from the side shown
in [C].
P–5834
553 Loader
BOB–TACH (Cont’d)
A
Remove the grease fitting (Item 1) [A] from the Bob–Tach
frame for the pivot pin (both sides). 1
NOTE: The pivot pin grease fitting needs to be
removed to prevent the pivot pin from being
locked into the Bob–Tach frame.
P–5837
Loosen the Bob–Tach mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] from the

pivot pin. B
Installation: Tighten the Bob–Tach mounting bolt to
125–140 ft.–lbs. (170–189 Nm) torque.
Strike the head of the mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] to release
the pivot pin from the tapered hole in the lift arm. 1
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] and washer.

Use a punch to push the pivot pin into the Bob–Tach
frame.
Installation: A longer bolt is necessary to install through
lift arms into the pivot pin, to pull the pivot pin into the lift
arms. P–5835
NOTE: Use tapered ream MEL1233 to clean the

tapered hole in the lift arms. The tapered hole
must be clean and free of debris to provide a
C
good contact surface for the pivot pin.
Repeat the procedure for the pivot pin on the other side
of the Bob–Tach.
Slowly back the loader away to remove the Bob–Tach
frame from the lift arms [C].
P–5832
Install the Bob–Tach mounting bolt in the pivot pin (Item

1) [D] and remove the pivot pin from the Bob–Tach.
D
Check for wear or damage and replace the pivot pins as
needed.
Installation: Push the pivot pin (Item 1) [D] into the
Bob–Tach frame. Install the end of the pin flush with the
edge of the Bob–Tach bushing (Item 2) [D].
1
P–5836
553 Loader
A
Bob–Tach Lever and Wedge
Use the following procedure to remove and install the
Bob–Tach lever (Item 1) [A], spring and wedge.
P–5840
Remove the debris shield (Item 1) [B], shield mounting

plate and nut from the lever.
B
1
P–5838
Remove the lever retaining bolt (Item 1) [C] and spring

(Item 2) [C].
C
P–5842
Remove the lever, spring and wedge assembly from the

Bob–Tach [D]. D
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [D] from the
spring/wedge assembly.
P–5839
553 Loader
Bob–Tach Lever and Wedge (Cont’d)
A
Disassemble the spring/wedge assembly as shown [A].
P–5841
Installation: Reassemble the spring/wedge assembly.

Tighten the spring so there is approximately 7.0’’ (178
B
mm) from the wedge to the top of the handle mounting
block as shown [B].
P–5843
553 Loader
LIFT ARMS
A
The items listed are necessary for the following
procedure:
Three Lifting Straps (with hooped ends) – 7 ft. in length
Overhead Chain Hoist
Install jackstands under the rear of the loader. (See Page
1–1.)
Remove the Bob–Tach from the loader. (See Page 5–12.)
Install one of the lifting straps around the center of the lift
arms crossmember as shown [A]. P–5849
Fasten the lifting strap to the chain from the chain hoist
[B] (Page 5–18). B
Raise the lift arms 4–5 inches (102–127 mm) above the
fender [B].
Remove the mounting bolt and nut from the lift cylinder
pivot pin (Item 1) [B] (both sides).
Installation: Tighten the pivot pin mounting bolt and nut
to 80–90 in.–lbs. (9–10 Nm) torque.
Remove the lift cylinder pivot pin (Item 1) [B] (both sides)
and lower the cylinder to the fender.
P–5854
Remove the tubeline brackets (Item 1) [C] from the

auxiliary tubelines (shown) and the tilt cylinder tubelines
C
(not shown).
P–5855
Remove the tilt cylinder tubeline bracket (Item 1) [D].

D
P–5858
553 Loader
LIFT ARMS (Cont’d)
A
Remove the mounting bolt and nut from the tilt cylinder 1
pivot pin (Item 1) [A].
in.–lbs (9–10 mm).
Remove the pivot pin (Item 1) [A] from the tilt cylinder.
Lower the tilt cylinder with attached tubelines to the floor.
P–5853
Remove the front auxiliary quick couplers (Item 1) [B].

Disconnect the auxiliary tubelines (Item 2) [B] from the
B
mounting bracket on the lift arm and plug the two (2)
tubelines.
2
1
P–5850
Put the middle of the second lifting strap (Item 1) [C] up

into the lift arm as shown. C
Install the lift cylinder pivot pin (Item 2) [C] and secure the
pin with the mounting bolt and nut.
1
Wrap both ends of the strap around the top of the lift arm
and down the back of the lift arm [C].
Continue to wrap the lifting strap around the lift arm a
second time [C].
Fasten both loops of the lifting strap to the chain
connected to the chain hoist [B]. (See Page 5–18.) 2
Use the same procedure to install the third lifting strap on

the right side lift arm. P–5857
Remove the mounting bolt and nut from the lift arm pivot
pin (Item 1) [D] (both sides) located in the loader upright. D
P–5856
553 Loader
LIFT ARMS (Cont’d)
A
Use a pry bar (Item 1) [A] to remove the pivot pin from the 2
upright (both sides).
Install a spacer (Item 2) [A] between the pivot pin and the
pry bar.
Pry the pivot pin out far enough to expose the mounting
bolt hole.
1
Use a punch in the pivot pin hole to remove it from the
upright (both sides).
P–5860
With all three lifting straps securely fastened to the chains

on the overhead chain hoist, slowly remove the lift arms B
from the loader [B].
Lower the lift arms slowly and put them on the floor.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the lift arms on
the loader.
P–5868
553 Loader
REAR GRILL
A
Stop the loader engine and open the rear door of the 1
loader.
The grill (Item 1) [A] has four (4) mounting bolts (Item 2)
[A].
grill.
2
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 180–200
Remove the grill from the loader. P–7034
553 Loader
FUEL TANK
A
Disconnect the fuel supply hose (Item 1) [A] from the fuel
tank.
1
The fuel supply hose is connected to the shutoff drain 4
(Item 1) [B] located under the fuel tank on the right side
of the loader.
Disconnect the fuel return hose (Item 2) [A] from the fuel
tank.
The fuel return hose is connected to the return tubeline on 2
the fuel injectors.
P–7029
Disconnect the two (2) wires from the fuel level sender
(Item 3) [A].
B
P–7023
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [C] from fuel tank

retaining strap (Item 2) [C].
C
Remove the fuel tank (Item 3) [C] from the loader. 3
If the fuel tank is being replaced due to damage, remove

the remaining fuel from the tank and put into an approved
fuel container.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the fuel tank.
1
Fuel Level Sender

To replace the fuel level sender (Item 3) [A], disconnect 2
the two (2) wires from the fuel sender. P–7027
Remove the five (5) mounting screws (Item 4) [A] from

the fuel sender.
Remove the fuel level sender from the fuel tank.
Inspect the sender and replace if necessary.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the fuel level
sender in the fuel tank.
553 Loader
REAR DOOR
A
The following tools are necessary to remove the rear
door:
Two Lifting Straps
Chain Hoist
Stop the loader engine and open the rear door. 1
Disconnect the rear light harness (Item 1) [A] from the
rear door if so equipped.
P–5818
Install one (1) lifting strap (Item 1) [B] through the top hole
on the right side of the rear door. B
Connect the lifting strap to the chain hoist [B].
Install the second lifting strap (Item 2) [B] through the top
hole on the left side of the rear door.
Connect the lifting strap to the chain hoist [B].
1
2
P–5919
Remove the two (2) hinge pins (Item 1) [C] from the upper
and lower hinges on the rear door. C
1
Remove the door from the loader.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the rear door.
P–5922
553 Loader
REAR DOOR
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–MainFrameSection
A
Door Handle Adjustment
AVOID INJURY
Never service or adjust the machine when the
engine is running unless instructed to do so in
the manual.
W–2012–0290
P–0159
Loosen the set screw (Item 1) [A] on the door handle.

B
Loosen the nut (Item 1) [B] on the rear door handle.
Turn the bolt (Item 2) [B] in or out to adjust the tension of
the handle.
The rear door should make contact at the top and bottom
of the door, against the loader frame when the door
handle is in the latched position.
NOTE: It takes approximately 50 lbs. (223 N) of force 2 3

1
to push the lever down when the latch is
adjusted correctly.
P–0160
Put the set screw in the up position as shown in [A].

Turn the latch pin (Item 3) [B] to a horizontal position as
shown.
Turning the latch pin horizontally allows set screw to be
tightened correctly against the flat surface of the bolt.
Tighten the set screw (Item 1) [A].
Tighten the nut (Item 1) [B] to 65–70 ft.–lbs. (88–95 Nm)
torque.
553 Loader
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Page
Number
ALTERNATOR
Adjusting the Alternator Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
Alternator Belt Shield Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
Alternator Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
Alternator Regulator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–12
Disassembly and Inspection – Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
Rectifier Continuity (Diode) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Rectifier (Diode) Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
Rotor Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Rotor Ground Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
Stator Continuity Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
Stator Ground Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
BATTERY
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
Fuse Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
Relay Switches Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
FRONT LIGHTS ELECTRICAL

Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–17 SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTER
Checking the Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
Replacing the Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
TROUBLESHOOTING
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3

553 Loader
WIRE LEGEND WIRE LEGEND (Cont'd) PARTS LEGEND PARTS LEGEND (Cont'd)
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE NO.'s COLOR GAUGE 1 Cab Harness 31 Hourmeter
10 Black 10 40FR Black 16 6707665 Rev. D
10A Black 12 40H Black 16 32 Fuel Gauge
10P Black 16 40L Black * 18 2 F or Future Use
12F Orange * 18 40R Black * 18 33 Engine Temperature Gauge
12FA Orange * 18 40S Black 16 3 Mainframe Ground
34 Voltmeter
12FB Orange 16 41 Pink 16 4 Operator Cab Ground
12H Orange 16 41A Pink 16 35 F or Future Use
12HW Orange * 18 41B Pink 16 5 Dome Light With Switch
12T Orange 16 42F Dk. Blue 16 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY) 36 Diode
12V Orange 16 42FL Dk. Blue 16 6 Headlight Harness (Opt.)
19D Red/White 16 42FR Dk. Blue 16 37 Rotating Beacon/Strobe
6578528 Rev. B
19G Red/White 16 42R Dk. Blue/White 16 Harness (Opt.) 6708318
19L Red/White 14 42RF Dk. Blue/White 16 7 Left Headlight (Opt.) 38 Strobe Light or Rotating
19LA Red/White 16 46B Brown/Red 16 Beacon (Opt.)
19LB Red/White 16 46H Brown 16 8 Left Front Turn Indicator (Opt.)
19S Red/White 14 46L Brown/Yellow 16 39 4-Way Flasher Harness
9 Light Connector
19W Red/White 16 46LA Brown/Yellow * 18 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY) 6709530
19WA Red/White 16 46LF Brown/Yellow 16 10 Flasher (Opt.) 40 Water Level Alarm (Opt .)
19WP Red/White 14 46LF Yellow (4-Way
21G White * 18 Flasher and Light 11 Shutdown Module (Opt.) 41 Water Level Probe ( Opt.)
21R White * 18 Harness 16
21RM White * 18 46LR Brown/Yellow 16 12 Horn (Opt.) 42 Left Front Turn Light
21S White 16 46R Brown/Green 16 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
23BL White/Black * 18 46RA Brown/Green * 18 13 Right Headlight (Opt.)
43 Left Clearance Lamp
23F White/Black 16 46RF Brown/Green 16 14 Right Front Turn Indicator (Opt.) ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
23HF White/Black * 18 46RF Green (4-Way
26A Lt. Blue/Green 16 Flasher and Light 15 Front Wiper Connector 44 Right Front Turn Light
26A Red Rental Harness 16 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
Harness 16 46RR Brown/Green 16 16 Front Wiper Harness (Opt.) 45 Right Clearance Lamp
28 Lt. Blue/Black * 18 46T Brown 16 6708269 Rev. A ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
28A Lt. Blue/Black * 18 49F Gray 16 17 Front Wiper Switch (Opt.)
30 Black 16 49T Gray 16 46 R ental Harness (C ab ) (O pt.)
30G Black 16 49V Gray 16 18 Front Wiper Motor (Opt.) 6714038
30T Black 16 50E Black 16 47 4-Way Flasher Light Harness
31 Yellow/Green * 18 56A Dk. Green/Yellow * 18 19 Front Windshield Washer ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY) 6714213
31 Yellow/Dk. Green 56L Lt. Green/Blue * 18 Pump and Water
(Rental Harness) 16 56P Lt. Green/Red * 18 48 Left Flasher Light ( > Euro.
Tank Reservoir (Opt.) Opt. ONLY)
31A Yellow/Dk. Green 16 57F Lt. Blue/Red * 18
31P Yellow/Green * 18 57L Lt. Green/Pink * 18 20 Glow Plug Switch 49 Right Flasher Light ( > Euro.
32 Yellow/Dk. Blue * 18 58B Dk. Green/Red * 18 21 Connection (Used ONLY on Opt. ONLY)
32A Yellow/Dk. Blue 16 59E Orange * 18 50 R ental C ontroller ( O pt .)
32F Yellow/Dk. Blue * 18 60H Black 16 Machines Without High
35H Yellow/Brown * 18 60W Black 16 Flow Switch)
51 F ront Flasher Harness (O pt .)
36 Purple * 18 60WA Black 16 22 Bucket Level Switch (Opt.) 6710905
36T Purple/White * 18 60WB Black 16
40 Black 16 63A Blue/Black 16 23 Beacon/Strobe Switch (Opt.) 52 L eft Turn Light (O pt .)
40A Black 16 63B Orange/Black 16 53 R ight Turn Light (O pt .)
40B Black 16 64 Orange/Blue 16 24 Hazard Switch (Opt.)
40D Black 16 25 Accessory Power Plug
40F Black 16
40FA Black 16 26 Ignition Switch
40FB Black 16
40FD Black 16 27 Keyless Ignition Module (Opt.)
40FL Black 16
28 Light Switch (Opt.)
29 Engine & Transmission Warning >NOT AVAILABLE DOMESTICALLY
Indicator Lights
* Some Machines Have 16 Gauge Wires. 30 Light Connectors
Printed in U.S.A. MC 2173LD (4-9-98)
CAB WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 1 38
(Harness 6707665 Rev. D) 38
49 46LF
42 46RF 44
40FB
TM
40FD
553 BICS (S/N 513011001-12382) 2 43 45

48 A B
(S/N 513031001-32569)
B
A
40FA
41A
B A
41A
41
A 46B
(Printed April 1998)

B 40B
46RF
46B
40B
40B
46B
37
E
38
52 OPTION EUROPEAN OPTION ONLY
38 53 46LF
46RF
46LF
46B
40F
19
41
11
F
D
E
B
A
7 13
39
A B
D BLA
46RF
RE
46LF
CK
A
B
A B
BA
B A
63A
YELLOW
60WB 60WA
PURPLE
B
46B
40B
6
WHITE
63
47
BLUE
B
A
10
B
6
A
B
A
5
40FB
46LF
BLACK
46RF
BLACK
46B
DK. BLUE
40F
40FD
RED
BLACK
DK. BLUE
8
F
12 14 63A
63
23BL
BA E
18 17
23F
32F
19WA
32
19WA
19W
OPTION OPTION 9 L X
60W
19W
46RF
46LF
16
46B
40F
21RM
B
A
F
E
21G
31P
x
31
19LB
19LA
46H
46T
F
E
B
A
BA
51
46RA
46LA
40R
40R
46RF
40FA
40L
46LF
60H
41B
42F
46B
64
B
A
42FR
40FR
15
30G
26A
42FR
40FL
42FL
40D
19D
50E
21RM
23BL
21G
31P
32F
23F
31
32
19W
60W
F 56P
A 58B
2 B
C
56A
57L
4 10 D 12HW
E 56L
3 10
CONNECTOR
IS VIEWED
FROM THE A T 46LR
H 46T
MATING SIDE F 31P
A 32F
L 23F
19S G H 46T X 64
64 X J 28 D 10A
57F W B 19WP
P 36T
59E V K 35H C 12F
J L 23F N 36
K K
G B 35H
31P F L C 12F
F C
E D N S
SR P
21R 42R
46RR R 41
32F E 19L
46LR
N 36
19L E G 19S
42R S P 36T M 21R
41 R D 10A B
12HW
19WP
56P
57L
56L
U 46RR
*
V 59E
42FL
W 57F 36
J 28 42RF
41A 41A
41B
+ 35
12FB
30G
35H
12H
12H
21RM
19WP
49V
12V
12V
49V
36T
49T
30T
30T
49T
42RF
49F
12T
12T
12FA
12FA
30
19LA
41
RED
19W
30
36
30
42R
40A
41A
19G
21R
42F
12F
19L
32
21S
26A
56A
19S
10P
40L
40
41
31
23HF
23HF
40FR
46LA
23BL
19LB
40FL
21G
19G
40H
46R
46H
40H
19D
28A
50E
58B
59E
46B
40A
28A
57F
46L
28
Denotes Ground
GREEN
* Connect Here for European Option

GREEN
+
BLACK
RED
Connect Here For Domestic Option 4
x 24 29 31
40
Wire 26A is connected to wire 23F when Shutdown 23 32
Module is NOT used, 28 33
22 27
21 34
46
A Connects To A E ngine W iring D iagram -R efer T o I ndex 25 26
20 50
B Connects To B E ngine W iring D iagram -R efer T o I ndex T0 32F (END UNHOOKED FROM INDICATOR LIGHT) 32A 21S F
TO INDICATOR LIGHT - TCP TERMINAL (32F) 32 E
T0 31P (END UNHOOKED FROM INDICATOR LIGHT) 31A 40S D
TO INDICATOR LIGHT - EOP TERMINAL (31P) 31 C

B B 23F 23F B
AB
A 26A 26A A
19WA
42RF
23HF
46LA
19LA
23BL
19LB
40FL
19W
21G
19G
40H
46R
40H
42R
46H
59E
46B
40A
40A
63B
63A
28A
41A
19D
42F
46L
19L
19WA
28A
28
40
41
21S 19S 19G 49V 49F 49T
3 3 3 3 21R 21S 3 3
1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 1 4 6 26A 1 4 6 12V 49T 49V 1 4 6
21RM 21RM
26A ST 19S 21R RED 36 12H 36T 12T
I B S I S I 30 12V
RED 19G G 12FB G
SO 56A
ST B I G I
56A 30T 12T
30 30G 30T
2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 Ignition Switch Keyless Ignition 2 5 Fuel Gauge Temp. Gauge Voltmeter 2 5
Shown in Shown in Shown in Shown in Module Shown in Shown in
"OFF" "OFF" "OFF" "OFF" "OFF" "OFF"
position 20 22 position 23 position 24 position 26 27 position 28 32 33 34 17 position
Printed in U.S.A.
MC 2173D (4-9-98)
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE NO.'s COLOR GAUGE 1 Cab Harness 6710501 Rev. B 28 Water Level Alarm (Opt.)
10 Black 10 49V Gray 16
10A Black 12 56A Dk. Green/Yellow 18 2 F or F uture U se 29 R ear Cab Harness (Opt.)
12F Orange 18 56L Lt. Green/Blue 18
12FA Orange 18 56P Lt. Green/Red 18 6711160
3 Mainframe Ground
12FB Orange 16 57L Lt. Green/Pink 18
12FC Orange 18 59E Orange 18 30 Flasher Connector
12H Orange 16 60H Black
4 Cab Ground
16
12HW Orange 18 60W Black 16 31 Left Flasher Light (Opt.)
12T Orange 16 60WA Black 16 5 Headlight Harness (Opt.)
12V Orange 16 60WB Black 16 6578528 Rev. B 32 4-Way Flasher Harness
19G Red/White 16 63A Blue/Black 16 (Opt.) 6712288 Rev. A
19L Red/White 14 or 16 63B Orange/Black 16 6 Left Headlight (Opt.)
19S Red/White 14 64 Orange/Blue 16 33 4-Way Light Flasher Harness
19W Red/White 16 7 Horn (Opt.) (Opt.) 6714213
19WA Red/White 16
19WP Red/White 14 8 Right Headlight (Opt.) 34 S trobe Light or Rotating
21R White 18
21S White 18 9 Front Wiper Connector Beacon (O pt .)
23BL White/Black 18 35 Right Flasher Light (Opt.)
23F White/Black 16 10 Front Wiper Harness (Opt.)
23HF White/Black 16 36 Hazard Switch (Opt.)
26A Lt. Blue/Green 16 6712259 Rev. A
26A Red (Rental Harness) 16 11 Front Wiper Switch (Opt.) 37 Water Level P robe (O pt .)
28 Lt. Blue/Black 18
30 Black 16 12 Diode 38 R ental Harness - Cab (O pt .)
30A Black 16
30G Black 16 6714038
30T Black 13 Front Wiper Motor (Opt.)
16 39 R ental Controller (O pt .)
31 Yellow/Dk. Green 16
31A Yellow/Dk. Green 16 14 Front Windshield Washer
40 R ight Turn Light (O pt .)
31P Yellow/Green 18 Pump and Water
32 Yellow/Green 16 Tank Reservoir (Opt.)
32A Yellow/Green 16 41 L eft Turn Light (O pt .)
32F Yellow/Dk. Blue 18 15 Wire NOT Used O n 553
35H Yellow/Brown 18 42 F ront F lasher Harness (O pt .)
36 Purple 18 16 Bucket Level Switch (Opt.) 6710905
36T Purple/White 16
40 Black 16
40A Black 16 17 Shutdown Module Connector
40B Black 16 (Rental Kit - To be
40C Black 16
40D Black 16 installed between
40F Black 16
40FB Black 16 the connectors)
40FD Black 16
40FL Black 16 18 Glow Plug Switch
40FR Black 16
40LT Black 16 19 Ignition Switch
40RT Black 16
40S Black 16
40T Black 16 20 Keyless Ignition Module (Opt.)
41 Pink 16
42F Dk. Blue 16 21 Light Switch (Opt.)
42FR Dk. Blue 16
42R Dk. Blue/White 16 22 Engine and Transmission
42RF Dk. Blue/White 16 W arning I ndicator L ights
46B Brown/Red 16
46H Brown 16 23 Hourmeter
46L Brown/Yellow 16
46LF Brown/Yellow or Yellow 16 24 Fuel Gauge
46LR Brown/Yellow 16
46LT Brown/Yellow 16 25 Coolant Temperature Gauge
46R Brown/Green 16
46RF Brown/Green or Green 16 26 Volt Gauge
46RR Brown/Green 16
46RT Brown/Green 16 27 R otating Beacon Harness
46T Brown 16
49F Gray 16 ( O pt .) 6708318
49T Gray 16
MC 2282LD (4-9-98)
Printed in U.S.A.
CAB WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 2
34
(H arness 6710501 Rev. B) 31 35
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513012383-30999)
AB
OPTION
(Printed April 1998) OPTION
A
B
33 13
41
46LF
40 14
46RF
34 34
46B
40F
OPTION
63B
60WB
A 46LF
B 46RF
A B
27 AB 6 63A
60WA
8
12 12
B
A
B
A
30
46B
BA
40B
40 21
A B
41 63A
46B
40B
XL
40FB
46LF
63B
46RF
40C F
40FD
B
A
11
A
X 19WA
L
46RF A A
5 19WA
46LF
BLACK
5
BLACK
DK. BLUE
DK. BLUE
ABC
46LF B B 46RF 19W
19L
E 46B
10
46H
E 46B
32 F 40F F 40B
46R
46H
40B
60W
46T
46L
19W
B
C
A
7
46LT
40D
46RT
1 3 4 6
34
9
40RT
46RT
40LT
46LT
42FR
40FR
40FR
42FR
42RF
40FL
30G
49F
19WP
2
60W
60H
5
BLACK
64
46RR
46LR
46H
46R
40B
46T
46L
RED
19L
36
40A
46T
D
E
A
46RT
46LT
40T
F 56P
F
J
36 2
C
A
B
B 56A
29 C 57L
A BC
OPTION C D 12HW
E 56L
X 64
CONNECTOR B 19WP
IS VIEWED D 10A
FROM THE
MATING SIDE P 36T
C 12F
19S G H 42F N 36
64 X J 28
K 35H
B 19WP
A
59E V K 35H F
32F
31P
J L 23F
K R 41
G B
31P F L C 12F S 42R
F C H 42F
E D N
SR P
21R E 19L
32F M 21R
N 36
12HW
19L E L 23F 23F
56P
57L
56L
23BL 26A
42R S P 36T 1
41 R D 10A
17
A G 19S
J 28
V 59E
2
42RF
12FC
12FA
12FA
32F
40FL
RED
RED
12FB
19G
21R
56A
26A
21S
42R
19S
28
31P
42F
30G
19L
35H
19G
12H
12H
49V
49V
12V
12V
49F
36T
49T
30T
30T
49T
12T
12T
40
41
36
30
30
23BL
4
30A
59E
10
3 10
GREEN
Denotes Ground
GREEN
BLACK
37 22 23
RED
A Connects To A E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer To I ndex 24

21
20 25
B Connects To B E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer to Index 4 26
19
18 38
C Connects To C Engine Wiring Diagram - Refer to Index 28
39
16
T0 32F (END UNHOOKED FROM INDICATOR LIGHT) 32A 21S F
15 TO INDICATOR LIGHT - TCP TERMINAL (32F) 32 E
T0 31P (END UNHOOKED FROM INDICATOR LIGHT) 40S D

31A
B B 23F 23F B
AB
A 26A 26A A
19WA
42RF
40FL
19W
19G
42R
23BL
59E
63B
63A
42F
19L
19WA
40
28
41
21R 21S 19S 19G 49V 49F 49T

1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 ST 19S 21S 26A 1 3 4 6 12V 49T 49V 1 3 4 6
26A 12T
I B 19G 21R RED 36 12H 36T 30 12V
RED S I S I
ACC G 12FB G
RED 56A RED
ST B I G +
30T 12T
56A 30 30G 30T
2 5 2 5 Ignition Switch Keyless Ignition 2 5 Fuel Gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge Volt Gauge 2 5
Shown in Module
Shown in Shown in Shown in
"OFF" "OFF" "OFF"
"OFF"
16 position
position 18 19 20 position 21 24 26 11 position
25
Printed in U.S.A. MC 2282D (4-9-98)

NO.'s COLOR GAUGE NO.'s COLOR GAUGE 1 European Cab Harness 24 Light Switch
10 Black 10 42F Dk. Blue 16
6711832 Rev. A Engine and Transmission W arning
10A Black 12 42FR Dk. Blue 16 25
10P Black 16 42R Dk. Blue/White 16 2 F or F uture U se I ndicator L ights
* 12A Orange 16 42RF Dk. Blue/White 16
12F Orange 18 46B Brown/Red 16 3 Mainframe Ground 26 Hourmeter
12FA Orange 18 46H Brown 16
12FB Orange 16 46L Brown/Yellow 16 4 Cab G round 27 Fuel Gauge
12FC Orange 18 46LF Brown/Yellow 5 Blinker/Warning Light Module 28 Coolant Temperature Gauge
12H Orange 16 or Yellow 16
12HW Orange 18 46LR Brown/Yellow 16 Connector 29 Volt Gauge
12T Orange 16 46LT Brown/Yellow 16
12V Orange 16 46R Brown/Green 16 6 Dome Light With Switch 30 Water Level Alarm (O pt .)
19D Red/White 16 46RF Brown/Green 7 Headlight Harness
* 19F Red/White 16 Or Green 16 31 Water Level P robe (O pt .)
19G Red/White 16 46RR Brown/Green 16 6578528 Rev. B 32 R ear Cab Harness ( Opt.)
19L Red/White 14 or 16 46RT Brown/Green 16 8 Left Headlight 6711160
* 19LA Red/White 16 46T Brown 16
33 F lasher (O pt .)
19S Red/White 14 49F Gray 16 9 H orn
19W Red/White 16 49T Gray 16 34 Left Flasher Light (Opt.)
19WA Red/White 16 49V Gray 16 10 Power Plug Connector
19WP Red/White 14 56A Dk. Green/Yellow 18 35 4-Way Flasher Harness
21R White 18 56L Lt. Green/Blue 18 11 Right Headlight (Opt.) 6712288 Rev. A
21S White 16 56P Lt. Green/Red 18 36 4-Way Light Flasher Harness
23BL White/Black 18 57L Lt. Green/Pink 18 12 Front Wiper Connector
(Opt.) 6714213
23F White/Black 16 59E Orange 18 13 Front Wiper Harness (Opt.) 37 S trobe Light or Rotating
26A Lt. Blue/Green 16 60H Black 16
26A Red (Rental 60W Black 16 6712259 Rev. A B eacon (O pt .)
Harness) 16 60WA Black 16 38 Right Flasher Light (Opt.)
28 Lt. Blue/Black 18 60WB Black 16 14 Front Wiper Switch (Opt.)
39 Hazard Switch (Opt.)
30 Black 16 63A Blue/Black 16 15 Diode
30A Black 16 63B Orange/Black 16 40 R ight Hand T urn (O pt .)
30G Black 16 64 Orange/Blue 16 16 Front Wiper Motor (Opt.)
30T Black 16 41 R ental Harness - Cab (O pt .)
31 Yellow/Dk. Green 16 17 Front Windshield Washer 6714038
31A Yellow/Dk. Green 16 Pump and Water 42 R ental Controller (O pt .)
31P Yellow/Green 18
32 Yellow/Dk. Blue 16 Tank Reservoir (Opt.) 43 R otating Beacon /Strobe Harness
32A Yellow/Dk. Blue 16 (O pt .) 6708318
18 Wire not used on 553
32F Yellow/Dk. Blue 18 44 L eft Hand Turn (O pt .)
35H Yellow/Brown 18 19 Bucket Level Switch (Opt.)
36 Purple 18 45 F ront Flasher Harness (O pt .)
36T Purple/White 16 20 Shutdown Module Connector 6710905
40 Black 16 (Rental Kit - To be
40A Black 16
40B Black 16 installed between
* 40C Black 16 the connectors)
40D Black 16
40F Black 16 21 Glow P lug Switch
40FB Black 16 22 Ignition Switch
40FD Black 16
40FL Black 16 23 Keyless Ignition Module (Opt.)
40FR Black 16
40LT Black 16
40RT Black 16
40S Black 16
40T Black 16
41 Pink 16
* This wire may NOT be found
on all harnesses.
Printed in U.S.A.
MC 2283LD (4-9-98)
EUROPEAN CAB WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 3 37 34 38
(Harness 6711832 Rev. A)
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513032570 and Above) AB 16
OPTION 17
A
B
36
63B
60WB
46LF
37
46RF
46B
40F
OPTION
44 A 46LF
37 40 B 46RF
63A
60WA
40 44 8 15 15
43 AB
11
63A
B
A
A B B A
AB
63B
19WA
14
46B
40B
A
B
19WA
33 7
B
A
A
B
7 19W
46B
40B
45
BLACK
BLACK
DK. BLUE
13
DK. BLUE
XL
40FB
46LF
46RF
40C F
10
40FD
E 46B
6
BLACK
60W
X
19W
RED
L F 40B
46RF A A 46LF
ABC
46LF B B 46RF 9
19L
40RT
46RT
40LT
46H
46LT
E 46B
35 F 40F 37 AB
B
A
C
12
46LT
40D
46RT
60W
19W
19WP
46RT
46LT
60H
19W
60H
10P
42FR
40FR
40T
64
AB
40FR
42FR
42RF
40FL
30G
5
A
B
CBA
C
A
B
32
BLACK
C
B
A
46RR
46LR
RED
40D
46H
46R
19D
40B
46T
46L
19L
A BC
OPTION
40C
12A
19F
40A
46T
D
E
A
F 56P
F
J
39 B 56A
C 57L
46H
46R
40B
46T
46L
D 12HW
C
1 3 4 6 E 56L
4 10
X 64
2 5
3 10 B 19WP
D 10A
39 P 36T
C 12F
A N 36
19S G H 42F
64 X J 28 K 35H
B 19WP A 32F
F 31P
59E V K 35H
J L 23F R
K 41
G B
31P F L C 12F S 42R
F C
E D N E
SR P
21R H
19L
42F
32F L 23F 23F
12HW
23BL 26A
56P
57L
56L
N 36
19L E 2O
42R S P 36T M 21R
41 R D 10A G 19S
CONNECTOR
IS VIEWED 1 J 28
FROM THE V 59E 2
RED
RED
12FB
21R
19G
21S
19G
19S
26A
56A
30G
35H
12H
12H
49V
12V
12V
49V
42RF
49F
36T
30T
49T
12T
12T
49T
30T
12FC
12FA
12FA
19LA
MATING SIDE
40FL
32F
28
30
30
42R
36
31P
42F
49F
40
41
23BL
30A
59E
12A
Denotes Ground GREEN 31
25 26
A Connects To A E ngine W iring Diagram - R efer T o I ndex 24 27
GREEN
BLACK
23 28
RED
4
B Connects To B E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer to Index 22 41 29
30 21
42
C Connects To C Engine Wiring Diagram - Refer to Index
19 T0 32F (END UNHOOKED FROM INDICATOR LIGHT) 32A
18
21S F
TO INDICATOR LIGHT - TCP TERMINAL (32F) 32 E
T0 31P (END UNHOOKED FROM INDICATOR LIGHT) 40S D

31A
B B 23F 23F B
AB
A 26A 26A A
19WA
42RF
23BL
19LA
40FL
19W
19G
59E
63B
63A
12A
42R
42F
49F
19WA
28
40
41
21R 21S 19S 19G 49V 49F 49T

1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 ST 19S 21S 26A 1 3 4 6 12V 49T 49V 1 3 4 6
26A
I B 21R RED 36 12H 36T 12T
RED 19G S I 30 12V
ACC S G I 12FB G
RED 56A RED
ST B I 30T G + 12T
56A 30 30G 30T
2 5 2 5 Ignition Switch Keyless Ignition 2 5 Fuel Gauge Coolant Temperature Gauge Volt Gauge 2 5
Shown in Module
Shown in Shown in Shown in
"OFF"
"OFF" "OFF" "OFF"
19 position
position 21 22 23 position 24 27 29 14 position
28

NO.'s COLOR GAUGE NO.'s COLOR GAUGE 1 Engine Harness 6708060 R ev . C 39 Heater Fan Switch (Opt.)
0 Black Cable 32T Yellow/Black 16
1 Red Cable 35H Yellow/Brown 16 2 Rear Light Harness (Opt.) 40 Heater Harness (Eng. Section) (Opt.)
1A Red 12 36F Purple 16 6707669 R ev . B 6660894
1AA Red 14 36T Purple/White 16
1AB Red 12 40 Black 16 3 Left Rear Taillight (Opt.) 41 F use and Fuse Cap -For Heater (O pt .)
1B Red 10 40L Black 16
40LA Black 16 4 Left Rear Light (Opt.) 42 R ear Wiper Harness (O pt .)
1D Red 16
1E Red 14 40R Black 16 6708285
5 Back-Up Alarm (Opt.)
1H Red 14 40RA Black 16
1L Red 12 41 Pink 16 6 Right Rear Light (Opt.) 43 R ear Wiper Motor (O pt .)
1P Red 14 41C Pink 16 44 R ear Wiper Switch (O pt .)
1S Red 12 41L Pink 16 7 R ight Rear Taillight (O pt .)
1SA Red 12 41R Pink 16 8 Hydrostatic Oil Pressure Switch 45 R ear Windshield Washer Pump and
1SB Red 16 42R Dk. Blue/White 16 R eservoir Tank ( > Euro . O pt .)
1SC Red 16 42RR Dk. Blue/White 16 9 F uel Shut -O ff Solenoid Opt.)
1SD Red 12 44B Dk. Green/Yellow 16 46 H ourmeter Harness ( Opt .)
10 Black 12 44BA Dk. Green/Yellow 16 10 Hydrostatic Oil Temperature Switch
10 Black (Heater Harness) 14 44BB Dk. Green/Yellow 16 11 Engine Coolant Oil Temperature 6700228
10A Black (Heater Harness) 14 46L Yellow 16 47 R ental Harness (O pt .)
10K Black 14 46LA Yellow 16 S ender
10L Black 14 46LR Brown/Yellow 16 12 A uxiliary Hourmeter (O pt .) 6714471 R ev. A
10S Black 16 46R Dk. Green 16 48 Euro . L ight Harness ( > E uro . Opt .)
12 Orange 16 46RA G reen 16 13 Engine Temperature Switch (O pt.)
12B Orange 16 46RR Brown/Green 16 6707670 Rev . C
12C Orange 14 * 46S B rown /R ed 16 14 Glow Plugs
12CA Orange 14 * 46SL B rown /R ed 16 49 R ear Taillight ( > Euro . Opt .)
15 Alternator
12CB Orange 12 * 46SR Brown /R ed 16 50 R ear Light ( > Euro . Opt .)
12CC Orange 16 46T Brown 16 16 Engine Oil Pressure Switch
12CD Orange 14 50E Black 16 51 R egistration Lamp -License Plate
12F Orange 16 59E Orange 16 17 Fuel Sender
60B Black 16 ( > E uro . Opt.)
12H Orange 16 18 Starter
12H Orange (Heater Harness) 14 60BA Black 16 52 Euro . L ight Harness ( > E uro. Opt.)
12HP Orange 16 * 60W Black 16 19 B ucket P osition Solenoid (O pt .)
14F Lt. Green 16 63W Orange/Black 16 6709048 R ev . B
14R Lt. Green/White 16 * 63WR Blue/Black 16 20 Battery 53 B ack - Up Alarm Harness (O pt .)
19A White 14 64 Orange/Blue 16 21 S witched Power Relay (Active With
19E Red/White 14 66 Orange/Green 16 6715659
19H Red/White 14 70 Black 14 I gnition Turned T o ON P osition
19L Red/White 12 70C Black 16 22 Starter Relay
19P Red/White 14 72B Pink/White 16
23 Glow Plug Relay
* 19PA Red/White 14 78 White 14
19S Red/White 14 24 Brake Relay
* 19WR Red/White 16
19WRA Red/White 16 25 Fused 10 Amp - BICS
20 Red 14
20 B lack (Hourmeter H arness) 16 26 Fused 15 Amp - Engine
20B Black 16 27 Fused 15 Amp - PWM (Attachment)
20C Black 16
20S Black 16 28 Fused 25 Amp - Brake
21 Yellow 14
21R White 16 29 Fused 25 Amp - Accessories
21S White/Lt. Green 14 30 Fused 25 Amp - Accessories
22 Orange 14
23 White/Black 16 31 Fused 25 Amp - Lights
23A White/Black 16
23B White/Black 16 32 Fused 10 Amp - BOSS
23F White/Black 16 33 Fused and Switched Power Connectors
23FA White/Black 16
26 Red 16 34 Back-up Alarm Harness (Opt.)
26A Red 16 6704358 R ev. A
28 Lt. Blue/Orange 16
28B Lt. Blue/Orange 12 35 Back-up Alarm Switch (Opt.)
30F Black 16 36 Heater Harness (Heater Section)
30H Black 16
31P Yellow/Green 16 (Opt.) 6660892
32PT Yellow/Dk. Blue 16 37 Relay Switch (Opt.)
* This wire may NOT be found > NOT AVAILABLE DOMESTICALLY
on all harnesses. 38 Heater and Heater Motor (Opt.)
Printed in U.S.A.
MC 2184LD (4-6-98)
ENGINE WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 1 49 49 49 49
(Harness 6708060 R ev. C) 50 50
50 5 51 50 5 51
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513011001-12382)
(S/N 513031001-32569)
(P rinted April 1998)
41C
41C
AB AB
D
B
B
A
A
C
42RR
42RR
42RR
42RR
40RA
40RA
12B
12B
40LA
40LA
D
D
48 52
C
42R
42R
B
A
B
A
66
66
46L
40L
46L
40L
41L
41L
44BB
45
44BA
40R
41R
46R
40R
41R
46R
F 66 F 66
E 46L E 46L
D 46R D 46R
C 12B C 12B
B 40 40R B 40 40R
A 41 41R A 41 41R
H 42R H 42R
CONNECTOR A 60W
63WR
G 44B G 63WR
IS VIEWED
FROM THE 1 D 10
EURO. OPTION EURO. OPTION
MATING SIDE
R 41
3 4 5 6 7 5
46T H G 19S S 42R
P 36T
28 J X 64
19P B N 36F
35H K V 59E K 35H 1
23F L J H X
K
A 32PT
2 53
42RR
40LA
42RR
66
40R
F
G W
12B
12B
41L
40L
B
12F C F 31P
66
L
66
L A 23F
V
42R
C F
40RA
U T 46LR 46LR E
41R
M
21R M D
NP E T F 66 F 66
RS U 46RR U 46RR 46RR D
32PT A B 19P 12B
40
C
B
C
B
12B
40
C 12B
T 46LR M
J
21R
28
41 A A 41
36F N H 42R OPTION
E 19L G
C
19S
12F
42R H OPTION
36T P S 42R E
F
19L
31P 31P
10 D R 41
X
V
64
59E
H 46T 36T
B 46RA 36F
D C 46LA 30F
YELLOW/GREEN
A 46T 35H BA
36
37 34
32PT 32T 32T
10
60BA
60B
60BA
66 66 66 10
22 12B 12B
8 16
21
20 11
E B 64
17
AB
A 12HP
35
F
A 12 50E B
19
AB
AB
B 70 59E A
D CB A
C 78
D 72B
13
G B 10K
AB
A 12C
38 33 H B 10L
33
AB
12C A 12CA
12H 12B 12CD 60W 45

63WR
10A 12C
19H
19A 12F
12H 1SC 63WR B B 63WR
26
AB
BA
12 19WR A A 19WR
25 1SB 19WRA
19WRA 44
27 19S
1D 63W
32
19A
20
21
22
42
28
31 19E
43
1E
19H
12H
10
30 12CB
29
1SA
C
B
A
19PA
1P
12H A A 12H
39
BA
AB
CBA
19L 30H B B 20
IL
12H
20
86 70C
46
CBA
NC
87A
30 19E 0 0 0 0 0
12
24
NO
87 78
C
B
A
85 72B
40
19H
12H
10
86 20S 14R A A PURPLE/RED

14F B B PURPLE 15
B
B
NC
87A
1A 1B
23
30
14
NO
87 28B 28B
85 28
19H
1H
86 20B
NC
87A
41 22
30 1AA 1AB
9
NO
87 21S
85 21R
86 10S 23FA 26
21
NC
87A
30 1S
NO
87 1SD
85 12CC
TO FUSE AND
Denotes Ground 1B
SWITCHED ACCESSORY
26 A
B
BA
23B 23 B
14F
23A
A Connects To A C ab Wiring Diagram - R efer To I ndex 1D
1E
B Connects To B C ab Wiring Diagram - R efer To I ndex

1P 47
1L
1AB
D Connects To D Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index 1S
1H
E Connects To E Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index 1 1 BATTERY
S
0 21S R
F Connects To F BICS W iring Diagram - R efer To Index 10
+ -
G Connects To G Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index 18
20
H Connects To H Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index
Printed in U.S.A.
MC 2184D (4-6-98)
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE NO.'s COLOR GAUGE 1 Engine Harness 6710496 Rev . A 39 Heater Fan Switch (Opt.)
0 Black Cable 32PT Yellow/Dk. Blue 16
1 Red Cable 32T Yellow/Black 16 2 Rear Light Harness (Opt.) 40 Heater Harness (Eng. Section) (Opt.)
1A Red 12 35H Yellow/Brown 16 6707669 R ev . B 6660894
1AA Red 14 36F Purple 16
1AB Red 12 36T Purple/White 16 3 Left Rear Taillight (Opt.) 41 F use and Fuse Cap -F or Heater (O pt .)
1B Red 10 40 Black 16 42 R ear Wiper Harness ( Opt .)
40A Black 16 4 Left Rear Light (Opt.)
1D Red 16
1E Red 14 40L Black 16 5 Back-Up Alarm (Opt.) 6712260
1H Red 14 40LA Black 16
1L Red 12 40R Black 16 6 Right Rear Light (Opt.) 43 R ear Wiper Motor (O pt .)
1S Red 12 40RA Black 16 44 R ear Wiper Switch (O pt .)
1SA Red 12 41 Pink 16 7 R ight Rear Taillight (O pt .)
1SB Red 16 41A P ink 16 8 H ydraulic Oil T emperature Switch 45 R ear Windshield Washer Pump and
1SC Red 16 41B P ink 16 R eservoir Tank ( > E uro. Opt.)
1SD Red 12 41C P ink 16 9 H ydraulic Charge P ressure Switch
1W Red 14 41L P ink 16 46 H ourmeter Harness (O pt. )
10 Black 14 41R P ink 16 10 R ental Harness (O pt .)
42F Dk. B lue 16 6700228
10A B lack 12 6714471 Rev . A
10A Black (Heater Harness) 14 42R Dk. Blue/White 16 11 Engine Coolant Temperature 47 Fuel Shut-Off Solenoid (Opt.)
10K Black 14 42RR Dk. Blue/White 16
10L Black 14 44B Dk. Green/Yellow 16 S ender 48 Euro . L ight Harness ( > Euro. Opt.)
10S Black 16 44BA Dk. Green/Yellow 16 12 A uxiliary Hourmeter (O pt.)
12 Orange 16 44BB Dk. Green/Yellow 16 6707670 R ev. C
12B Orange 16 46B Brown/ R ed 16 13 T emperature Switch (O pt .)
14 46L Yellow 16 49 R ear Taillight ( > Euro. O pt .)
12C Orange
12CA Orange 14 46LA Yellow 16 14 Glow Plugs 50 R ear Light ( > E uro. Opt.)
12CB Orange 12 46LR Brown/Yellow 16
46LRA B rown /Yellow 16 15 Alternator 51 R egistration Lamp -L icense Plate
12CC Orange 16
12CD Orange 14 46R Dk. Green 16 16 Engine Oil Pressure Switch ( > Euro. Opt .)
12F Orange 16 46RA G reen 16
12H Orange 16 46RR Brown/Green 16 17 F uel L evel Sender 52 Euro . L ight Harness ( > Euro. Std .)
12H Orange (Heater Harness) 14 46RRA B rown /Green 16
46S B rown /Red 16 18 Starter 6709048 R ev . B
12HP Orange 16
12W O range 16 46SL Brown /Red 16 19 F uel Shut -Off Solenoid (O pt.)
46SR Brown /Red 16 53 B eacon Switch (O pt .)
14F Lt. Green 16
14R Lt. Green/White 16 46T Brown 16 20 Battery 54 S trobe Harness (O pt.) 6712258
19A White 14 50E Black 16
19E Red/White 14 59E Orange 16 21 S witched Power Relay (A ctive With 55 B eacon Harness (O pt .) 6708318 R ev. A
19H Red/White 14 60B Black 16 I gnition Turned T o ON P osition
60BA Black 16 56 B eacon or Strobe Light (O pt .)
19L Red/White 12 or 16 22 Starter Relay
19LA R ed /White 12 60W Black 16 57 Diode
19LB R ed /White 14 or 16 60WA B lack 16 23 Glow Plug Relay
19S Red/White 14 60WB B lack 16 58 B ucket P osition S olenoid (Opt.)
19W Red /W hite 14 63W Orange/Black 16 24 Brake Relay
19WR Red/White 16 63WR Blue/Black 16 59 B ack - up Alarm Harness (O pt.)
25 Fused 10 Amp - BICS
19WRA Red/White 16 64 Orange/Blue 16 6715659
20 Red 14 66 Orange/Green 16 26 Fused 15 Amp - Engine
20 Black (Hourmeter H arness) 16 70 Black 14
20B Black 16 70C Black 16 27 Fused 15 Amp - PWM (Attachment)
20C Black 16 72B Pink/White 16 28 Fused 25 Amp - Brake
20S Black 16 78 White 14
21 Yellow 14 29 Fused 25 Amp - Accessories
21R White 16
21S White/Lt. Green 12 30 Fused 25 Amp - Accessories
22 Orange 14 31 Fused 25 Amp - Lights
23 White/Black 16
23A White/Black 16 32 Fused 10 Amp - BOSS
23B White /Black 16
23F White/Black 16 33 Fused and Switched Power Connectors
23FA White/Black 16
26 R ed 16 34 Back-up Alarm Harness (Opt.) 6704358 Rev . A
28A L t. Blue/Orange 16 35 Back-up Alarm Switch (Opt.)
28B Lt. Blue/Orange 12
30F Black 16 36 Heater Harness (Heater Section)
30H Black 16 (Opt.) 6660892
31P Yellow/Green 16 > NOT AVAILABLE DOMESTICALLY
37 Relay Switch (Opt.)
38 Heater and Heater Motor (Opt.)
MC 2387LD (4-8-98)
Printed in U.S.A.
ENGINE WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 2 49 49 49 49
(Harness 6710496 R ev. A) 50 50
50 5 51 50 5 51
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513012383-30999)
(S/N 513032570 and Above)
41C
41C
AB AB
D
A
B
A
B
C
42RR
42RR
42RR
42RR
40RA
40RA
40LA
12B
40LA
12B
D
D
48 52
C
42R
42R
B
A
B
A
66
66
46L
41L
40L
46L
41L
40L
44BB
45
44BA
40R
41R
46R
40R
41R
46R
F 66 F 66
E 46L E 46L
D 46R D 46R
C 12B C 12B
B 40 40R B 40 40R
A 41 41R A 41 41R
H 42R H 42R
CONNECTOR A G 44B G 63WR

60W
63WR
IS VIEWED
FROM THE 1 D 10A
EURO. OPTION EURO. OPTION
MATING SIDE
R 41A
3 4 5 6 7 5
42F H G 19S
S 42R
P 36T
28A J X 64
19W B N 36F
35H K V 59E A 32PT 1

K 35H
23F L K
J H X H 42F
2 59
42RR
42RR
40LA
66
40R
12B
F
B G W
12B
F 31P
40L
41L
40RA
12F C
66
66
L A L 23F
41R
V
42R
C F M 21R 46LRA
M U E
21R M N PD
RS
E T J 28A
46RRA D
F 66 F 66
C 12B
32PT A B 19W 12B
40
C
B
C
B
12B
40
G 19S 41 A A 41
36F N
E 19LA C
E
12F
19LA 42R H
H 42R OPTION OPTION
36T P S 42R F 31P 31P
10 D R 41A
X
V
64
59E
36T
B 46RA 36F
D C 46LA 30F
YELLOW/GREEN
A 46T 32PT 32T 32T
35H
36
37 34 50E B
58 9 8
AB
AB
59E A
60BA 60BA
10 60B 66 66 66
22
21
12B 12B
11 16
20
46T F 13
E B 64
17
AB
A 12HP 12W G
35 40A J
A 12 63WR K
F B 70 19LB A
D CB A
C 78
D 72B
41B
42F
B
C
C or J
G B 10K
46LR
46RR
D
E
AB
A 12C
38 33 H B 10L
33
AB
12C A 12CA
56
12H 12B 12CD
10A 12C 42
19H
19A 12F 60W 45
12H 63WR
1SC
26 12
25 1SB
K 63WR
27 19S
1D
B
32 K
19A
63W
20
22
21
B
A
63WR
44 19WRA 55
28 19WRA
19WR
31 57 57
40B
46B
19E
1E
19H
12H
10
G 19WR
30 12CB
60WB
29 1SA
C
B
A
60WA
19PA
1W 43 63W
40B
46B
39 19L
CB A
IL
F
E
86 70C
CBA
54
NC
87A
30 19E
24
NO
87 78
C
B
85 72B
A
12H A A 12H
40
BA
AB
30H B B 20 J 40
19H
12H
10
86 A 19L
20S
M
12H
20
NC
87A
1A
23 30
46 12
14
NO
87 28B 28B
E
F
0 0 0 0 0
85 28A
19H
46B
1H
40A
86 20B 14R A A PURPLE/RED 19L
14F B B PURPLE 15 40
B
B
53
NC
87A 40A
41 22
30 1AA 1AB 1B
46B
NO
87 21S
85 21R
86 10S
9
21
NC
87A
1S 23FA
30
NO
87 1SD
85 12CC 26
Denotes Ground 1B
14F
A Connects To A Cab Wiring Diagram - R efer To I ndex 1D TO FUSE AND

SWITCHED ACCESSORY
26 A
B
BA
1E 23B 23 B
1W
B Connects To B Cab Wiring Diagram - R efer To I ndex 1L
23A
1AB
C Connects To C Cab Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index 1S
10
1H
D Connects To D Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index 1 1 BATTERY
S
0 21S R
E Connects To E Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index
19WRA
10
63WR
19WR
+ -
19WRA
63W
46B
40A
19L
F Connects To F BICS Wiring Diagram - Refer To Index
40
20 18
G Connects To G Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index 1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6
H Connects To H Controls and A ttachment Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index
J Connects To J A ccessory Wiring Diagram - R efer To Index

2 5 2 5
K Connects To J T his Page if machine does NOT have the A ccessory Wiring H arness Shown in Shown in
"OFF" "OFF"
44 position 53 position
M Connects To J T his Page if machine does NOT have the A ccessory Wiring H arness

WIRE LEGEND PARTS LEGEND
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE
12 Orange 16 1 BICS Controller Harness
70 Black (BICS Controller
Harness) 16 Connector (All S/N Machines)
70 Black (Mainframe
Harness) 14 6706828 R ev . E and 6710312 Rev . A
70A Black 14
70B Black 16 1A BICS Controller Harness
70D Black 16 Connector * 6706828 R ev. E
71A Dk. Green 16
72A Red (Color Was Pink/Red 1B BICS Controller Harness
on some machines) 16
72B Pink/White 16 Connector + 6710312 R ev. A
73A Blue (Color Was Dk. Blue BICS Controller
2
73B White (Color Was Brown
3 Traction Lock (Brake) Override
74A Lt. Blue/Red 16 Switch
74B Lt. Blue/Black 16
74C Lt. Blue/Green 16 4 Seatbar Sensor
75A Dk. Blue/White 16
75B Gray 16 5 Seat Sensor
76A Yellow/Red 16
76B Yellow/Black 16 6 Traction Lock (Manual Brake)
76C Yellow/Green 16
78 White (Color Was Red Assembly Switch
on some Mainframe
Harnesses) 14 7 Traction Lock (Brake)
Solenoid
8 Hydraulic Tilt Lock Valve
Solenoid
9 Mainframe Controller Harness
Connector (All S/N
Machines) 6706876 R ev. E
and 6710313
9A Mainframe Controller Harness
Connector * 6706876 R ev. E
9B Mainframe Controller Harness
Connector + 6710313
* S/N for BICS Controller Harness

6706828 Rev. E and Mainframe
Controller Harness 6706876 Rev. E
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513011001-11592)
(S/N 513031001-31678)
+ S/N for BICS Controller Harness

6710312 (Rev. A) and Mainframe
Controller Harness 6710313
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513011593-12382)
(S/N 513031679-32569)

TM
BICS WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 1
TM
(BICS Controller Harness 6706828 Rev. E or
6710312 Rev. A)
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513011001-12382)
(S/N 513031001-32569)
75A
75B
A
B
B
AB
74B
74C
74A
C
B
A
3
C
B
A
GREEN
BLACK
RED
1 71A
9 76B
4
1 16 70
5
10 74B
19 76C
20 74C
13 73A
14 76A 76A A A RED
22 75B 76C C C GREEN
23 73B 76B B B BLACK
15 74A 7
8 12
5 72B
6
12 75A
2 3 72A
72A
73B
73A
72B
71A
70
12
G
D
C
B
A
E
F
G
D
C
E
B
A
F
1B
1A
B G
WHITE
BLUE
C A F
BLACK
WHITE
D E
RED
B
A
C
A
B
BA
D E
C A F
A B C
B G
9B
G
D
C
E
B
A
F
9A
G
D
C
B
A
E
F
AB
70B
73B
73A
72B
72A
71A
12
70B
73B
73A
72B
72A
71A
A
B
12
A B C
73A
73B
C
B
A
72A
70A
78
9
D 72B
A BCD
F C
B
78
70
A 12
8
F Connects To F E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer to I ndex
71A A BA A RED MC 2172D (4-6-98)
AB
70D B B RED
Printed in U.S.A.
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE
12 Orange 16 1 BICS Controller Harness
54BF Purple/White 16
54BT Purple/Red 16 6712134 R ev . A
Harness) 16 2 BICS Controller
70 Black (Mainframe
Harness) 14 3 Traction Lock (Brake) Override
70A Black 14
70B Black 16 Switch
70D Black 16 4 Seatbar Sensor
71A Dk. Green 16
72A Red 16 5 Seat Sensor
72B Pink/White 16
73A Blue 16
73B White 16 6 Traction Lock (Manual
74A Lt. Blue/Red 16 Brake) Assembly Switch
74B Lt. Blue/Black 16
74C Lt. Blue/Green 16 7 Traction Lock (Brake) Solenoid
75B Gray 16 (Pull Coil is 0.4-0.5 ohms -
76A Yellow/Red 16
76B Yellow/Black 16 W hite to Black )
76C Yellow/Green 16
77B Yellow/Blue 16
(Hold Coil is 10-11 ohms -
78 White 14 R ed to Black )
8 H ydraulic Tilt L ock Valve
Solenoid (8-10 ohms)
9 Mainframe Controller Harness
6710313
10 NOT USED

TM
TM
(BICS Controller Harness 6712134 REV. A)
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513012383-30999)
75A
75B
A
B
B
A B
74B
74C
74A
C
A
B
3
C
A
B
GREEN
BLACK
RED
1 71A
9 76B
16 70 4
1 10 74B
19 76C 5
20 74C
13 73A
21 54BT 76B B B BLACK

76C C C GREEN
14 76A 76A A A RED
22 75B
23 73B
15 74A
8 12
7 54BF
2 5 72B
7
12 75A
71A
73B
73A
12
70
3 72A
6
G
C
B
A
F
2 77B
72B
72A
WHITE
B G
BLUE
C A F
D
E
BLACK
WHITE
D E
RED
A
B
AB
A 77B
C
A
B
10
CB A
B 54BF
C 54BT A B C
D E
C A F
9 B G
AB
A
B
A B C
G
D
C
B
E
73B
73A
C
B
A
72B
72A
71A
70B
73B
73A
12
72A
70A
78
D 72B
A B CD
F C
B
78
70
A 12
8
F Connects To F E ngine W iring Diagram - R efer to Index
70D B B RED
AB
BA
71A A A RED

NO.'s COLOR GAUGE
12 Orange 16 1 European BICS C ontroller Harness
12A Orange 16
12B Orange 16 6712135 R ev. B
54BF Purple/White 16
54BT Purple/Red 16 2 BICS Controller
Harness) 16 3 Traction Lock (Brake) Override
70 Black (Mainframe
Harness) 14 Switch
70A B lack (BICS C ontroller 4 Seatbar Sensor
Harness) 16
70A Black ( Mainframe 5 Seat Sensor
Harness) 14
70B Black 16
70D Black 16
6 Traction Lock (Manual
71A Dk. Green 16 Brake) Assembly Switch
72A Red 16
72B Pink/White 16 7 Traction Lock (Brake) Solenoid
73A Blue 16
73B White 16 (P ull Coil is 0.4-0.5 ohms -
74A Lt. Blue/Red 16
74B Lt. Blue/Black 16 W hite to B lack )
74C Lt. Blue/Green 16 (H old C oil is 10-11 ohms -
75B Gray 16 Red to Black)
76A Yellow/Red 16
76B Yellow/Black 16 8 H ydraulic Tilt Lock Valve
76C Yellow/Green 16
77A Yellow 16 S olenoid (8-10 ohms)
77B Yellow/Blue 16
78 W hite 14 9 Mainframe Controller Harness
6710313
10 NOT USED
11 Travel Control Switch
(European Use Only)

TM
TM
(EUROPEAN BICS Controller Harness 6712135 REV. B)
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513032570 and Above)
75A
75B
B
A
B
A B
70A
77A
12A
1 3 4 6
74B
74C
74A
C
A
B
2 5
4 4 70A
11 2 2 12A
11 3 3 77A 3
C
B
A
GREEN
BLACK
4 77A
RED
1 71A
9 76B
4
16 70
1 10 74B
5
19 76C
20 74C
13 73A
21 54BT 76B B B BLACK

7
76C C C GREEN
14 76A 76A A A RED
22 75B
23 73B
15 74A 6
8 12
7 54BF
2 5 72B
70B
73B
73A
71A
12B
12 75A
G
C
B
A
F
3 72A
BLACK
WHITE
2 77B
RED
72B
72A
WHITE
B G
BLUE
C A F
D
E
D E
C
B
A
A
B
A 77B A B C
10
C BA
B 54BF AB
C 54BT
D E
9
C A F
B G
AB A B C
A
B
G
D
C
E
B
A
C
A
B
73A
73B
70B
73B
73A
72B
72A
71A
12
72A
70A
78
D 72B
A BCD
F C 78
F Connects To F Engine Wiring Diagram - Refer to Index B
A
70
12
70D B B RED
AB
71A A BA A RED
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE
10 B lack 14 1 L eft Deluxe Multi -Switch Control
12 Orange 16 H andle ( Opt.)
12A Orange 16 2 Right Deluxe Multi -Switch Control
12B Orange 14
12B O range (P ower Harness ) 16 H andle ( Opt.)
12C Orange 16 3 Horn Switch (Domestic Opt .)
12D Orange 16 (E uro . Std.)
12E Orange 16 4 Horn Harness ( Domestic Opt.)
19 Red/White 14
50 Black 14 (E uro . Std .) 6708506
50A Black 16 5 NOT USED
50B Black 16
50C Black 16 6 Power Relay - Stump Grinder
50D Black 16 7 Power Relay - Angle Broom
50E Black 14
50W Black 16 8 Power Relay - Front/Rear
56A Dk. Green/Yellow 16 Auxiliary
56B Yellow 16 9 Plug-In Connector - Lift Arm
56BA Yellow 16 Harness - Boom Electrical
56BAA Yellow 16
56BB Dk. Blue 16
Attachment Connector
56BBA Dk. Blue 16 10 Diode Module
56BBB Dk. Blue 16 11 L ift Arm Attachment
56R Dk. Green 16
56RA Dk. Green 16
H arness 6705901 Rev. D
56RAA Dk. Green 16 12 Connector-Water Kit
56RB White (*Orange/White) 16
56RBA Orange/White 16
13 NOT USED
56RBB Orange/White 16 14 Connector - Fused and Switched
56S Dk. Green 16
56SA Dk. Green 16
15 For Future use
56SG Dk. Green 16 16 Adapter Connector - Optional
56W Lt. Green/White 16 Attachment Harness
57B Yellow/Red (*Lt. Blue) 16
57BA Lt. Blue 16
17 New to Old Adapter Harness
57BB Lt. Blue 16 6706391
57BBA Lt. Green 16 18 Adapter Connector - Older
57BBB Lt. Green 16 Model Attachments
57BBC Lt. Green 16
57BC Yellow/White 16 19 Horn Connector
57C Orange/Dk. Blue 16 20 Power Wiring Harness
57CA Orange/Dk. Blue 16
6706816 R ev . B
57CB Orange/Dk. Blue 16
57RB Yellow/Red (*Red) 16 21 Connector - Power and Fused
57RR Yellow/Lt. Green (Angle Broom)
(*Brown/White) 16 22 Power Wiring Harness
57RRA Yellow/Lt. Green (*Brown) 16
6706446 Rev. A
57RRB Brown 16
57RRC Brown 16
57RRD Red 14
57RRE White 16
57RRF Brown/Yellow 16
64 Orange/Blue 16
* Alternate Color Used On

Some Harnesses.
CONTROLS AND ATTACHMENTS WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 1
(A ttachment Harness 6705901 Rev. D) "B" "C" "D" "A"
TM 1
"C" Switch
2
553 BICS (S/N 513011001-12021) "A" Switch "A" "C" "D" "B"
"C" Switch
(S/N 513031001-32073) "A" Switch 3

ORANGE/WHITE
"D" Switch
ORANGE/BLUE
YELLOW/LT.GREEN
"B" Switch
"B" Switch
DK.GREEN/LT.GREEN
YELLOW/RED
"D" Switch
LT.GREEN/WHITE
ORANGE/WHITE
DK.GREEN/RED
ORANGE
YELLOW
BROWN
GREEN
DK.GREEN
12HP
ORANGE
YELLOW
WHITE
GREEN
BLUE
64
A
B
4
C
A
A
B
C
ORANGE/BLUE
C
B
B
A
A
D
C
B
A B
ORANGE
CBA
A B CBA
BA
B
A
G 19
A B
CBA AB
15 A BC
A
B
AB BA
C
B
A
ABC AB ABC
64
12B
A B
64
A
B
E
B
A
C
A
B
A
A
C
A
B
B
A
12C
12A
10
12
12D
56RB
56BB
12A
10
12E
56W
56R
56B
12
BLUE CENTER
12 YELLOW RT
57RRA
57RR
57RB
10
57B
20 11
BROWN LT RT
AB A 56W
50W TM
B LT
57RRE G
GD
57RRB F RED GD
56BA
56RA
E
D
BLACK TM
57BC C
56BBA B
56RBA A ADAPTER
CONNECTOR
13 57BA K
IS VIEWED
57RRF J FROM THE
MATING SIDE 18
17
AB
A 56A
57RRD A A 56SA BROWN 56SA LT

50E B B
57BB C C
57RRC D D
56RBB E E 56RC BLACK 56RC TM
56BBB F F 56BC BLUE 56BC CENTER
56RAA G G 56R RED 56R GD
14 56BAA
12C
H
K
H
K
56B YELLOW 56B RT
57CB L L
56S M M
A 12B 16
BA
A
B
AB
B 50
9
BLACK
A 57RRC D
BLACK E
19
BA
A
E 56RBB
AB
ORANGE
BLUE F
RED/WHITE
N P
D
E F 56BBB E P
N
D
56S M M F F M
21 57BB C
C A
A 57RRD BROWN A G
A C
L
L G B
B
K H H K
J J
A 56SG 57CB L G 56RAA RED G
57RRD
57RRE
BA
57RRF
22
57BBA
57BBB
H 56BAA YELLOW H
57RR
57RB
57CA
57BC
50C
57C
50D
50B
19
12C K B 50E
57BBC
56SG
56SA
50A
5 87A
87A
87A
LOADER ADAPTER
86
30
85
86
30
85
86
30
85
87
87
87
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
87A
IS VIEWED IS VIEWED
86
30
85
87
NO NC NO NC NO NC FROM THE FROM THE

MATING SIDE MATING SIDE
6 NO NC
7 8 8
D Connects To D E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer T o I ndex
E Connects To E E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer T o I ndex
G Connects To G E ngine Wiring Diagram - R efer T o I ndex
Printed in U.S.A.
MC2390D (3-25-98)
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE
12 Orange 16 1 L eft Deluxe Multi -Switch Control
12A Orange 16 H andle (Opt .)
12B Orange 14 2 R ight D eluxe Multi -Switch Control
12C Orange 16 Handle (O pt .)
19 Red/White 14
50 Black 14 3 H orn Switch (Domestic Opt.)
50A Black 16 (Euro. S td.)
50B Black 16 4 H orn Harness (Domestic Opt.)
50C Black 16 (E uro. Std.) 6708506
50D Black 16
5 Connector-Water Kit
50E Black 14
50W Black 16 6 NOT USED
50Z Black 16
56A Dk. Green/Yellow 16 7 Connector - Fused and Switched
56B Yellow 16 8 Connector - Power and Fused
56BA Yellow 16 (Angle Broom)
56BAA Yellow 16 9 NOT USED
56BB Dk. Blue 16
56BBA Dk. Blue 16 10 Power Relay - Stump Grinder
56BBB Dk. Blue 16
11 Power Relay - Angle Broom
56R Dk. Green 16
56RA Dk. Green 16 12 Power Relay - Front/Rear
56RAA Dk. Green 16 Auxiliary
56RB White 16 13 Boom Connector
56RBA Orange/White 16
56RBB Orange/White 16 14 Diode Module
56S Dk. Green 16
15 NOT USED
56SA Dk. Green 16
56SG Dk. Green 16 16 NOT USED
56W Lt. Green/White 16
57B Yellow/Red 16 17 Main Frame Attachment Harness (Opt.)
57BA Lt. Blue 16 6710300 Rev. A
57BB Lt. Blue 16 18 Boom Attachment Harness (Opt.)
57BBA Lt. Green 16 6710299
57BBB Lt. Green 16 19 Attachment Connector
57BBC Lt. Green 16
57BC Yellow/White 16 20 Adapter Connector - Optional
57C Orange/Dk. Blue 16 Attachment Harness
57CA Orange/Dk. Blue 16 21 New to Old Adapter Harness (Opt.)
57CB Orange/Dk. Blue 16 6706391
57J Lt. Green 16 22 Adapter Connector - Older
57N Pink 16 Model Attachments
57P White 16
57RB Yellow/Red 16
57RR Yellow/Lt. Green 16
57RRA Yellow/Lt. Green 16
57RRB Brown 16
57RRC Brown 16
57RRD Red 14
57RRE White 16
57RRF Brown/Yellow 16

"B" "C" "D" "A"
1
"C" Switch
2
CONTROLS AND ATTACHMENTS WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 2 "A" Switch "A" "C" "D" "B"
"C" Switch
(Harness 6710299 and 6710300 Rev. A) "A" Switch 3
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513012022-30999)
ORANGE/WHITE
"D" Switch
ORANGE/BLUE
YELLOW/LT.GREEN
(S/N 513032074 and Above) "B" Switch
"B" Switch
DK.GREEN/LT.GREEN
YELLOW/RED
(P rinted April 1998) "D" Switch
LT.GREEN/WHITE
ORANGE/WHITE
DK.GREEN/RED
ORANGE
YELLOW
BROWN
GREEN
DK.GREEN
12HP
ORANGE
YELLOW
WHITE
GREEN
BLUE
64
B
A
4
C
A
A
B
C
ORANGE/BLUE
C
A
B
A
C
D
B
A B
ORANGE
CB A
A B CBA
BA
D E
B
A
NOT NOT
USED USED
A B
CBA
BA
16
C
B
A
ABC 15 E
57RRA
A
57B
12A
CBA
J
C
B
A
57J
56RB
56BB
B 50E
57RR
57RB
C
B
A
12A
F
H
C
B
A
56BAA
5
K 12C
14 57RRD A C 57BB
56W
56R
56B
50Z
57N
57P
12
57J
J
H K
G
B
A 56W 56RAA
G L
L 57CB
AB
A C
B 50W
57RRE G
56BBB F F
E
D
N
M
M 56S
P
57RRB F
N 57N
*
56BA E
56RA
57BC
D
C
56RBB E D 57RRC
56BBA B
56RBA A
P 57P
6 57BA K
57RRF J
19
17 18
AB
A 56A
57RRD A A 57RRD 57RRD A

50E B B 50E 50E B
57BB C C 57BB 57BB C
57RRC D D 57RRC 57RRC D
56RBB E E 56RBB 56RBB E
56BBB F F 56BBB 56BBB F
56RAA G G 56RAA 56RAA G
56BAA H H 56BAA 56BAA H
57J J J 57J 57J J
12C K K 12C 12C K
7 57CB
56S
L
M
L
M
57CB
56S
57CB
56S
L
M
57N N N 57N 57N N
57P P P 57P 57P P
G A 12B
BA
B 50
13 13
H A 19
BA
8
12C K 12C K
J 57J J 57J
A 56SG
56RBB E E 56RBB
57RRD
BA
57RRE
57RRF
57BBA
57BBB
57RR
57RB
57CA
57BC
50C
57C
50D
50B
19
57RRC D P 57P 57P P D 57RRC

57BBC
57BB C N
56SG
N 57N
56SA
57N C 57BB
50A
9
87A
87A
87A
86
87
30
85
86
87
30
85
86
87
30
85
50E B H 56BAA 56S M H 56BAA
M 56S B 50E
87A
86
87
30
85
NO NC NO NC NO NC
57RRD A 57CB L
L 57CB A 57RRD
* *
56BBB F 56BBB F
G
NO NC
56RAA G 56RAA
11 12 12
10 20 21
L ORANGE BLUE CENTER
K ORANGE A 56SA BROWN 56SA LT
22 YELLOW RT
E 56RC BLACK 56RC TM
H YELLOW F
G
56BC
56R
BLUE
RED
56BC
56R
CENTER
GD
D Connects To D Engine Wiring D iagram - R efer To I ndex J H 56B YELLOW 56B RT BROWN LT RT
K
B
H
G
G RED
TM
LT
C A
E Connects To E Engine Wiring D iagram - R efer To I ndex L
F A BROWN GD
M
D
RED GD
E
G Connects To G Engine Wiring Diagram - Refer to Index N
*
P
F BLUE
*
BLACK TM
*
E BLACK
H Connects To H Engine Wiring Diagram - Refer to Index LOADER CONNECTOR IS VIEWED
FROM THE MATING SIDE
Printed in U.S.A. MC2384D (3-25-98)
NO.'s COLOR GAUGE
12A Orange 16 Cab Accessory Harness (Opt.)
12W Orange 16
1
19F Red/White 16 6710481 Rev. B
19L Red/White 16
19LA Red/White 16 2 F lasher (Opt.)
19WPA Red/White 16
40 Black 16 3 Rear Wiper Rocker Switch (Opt.)
40A Black 16
40B Black 16 4 H azard Light Rocker Switch
40C Black 16 (O pt.)
40D Black 16
40F Black 16 5 Beacon Rocker Switch (Opt.)
40FA Black 16
40FB Black 16 6 Blinker/Warning Light Module
40FC Black 16 (O pt.)
40FD Black 16
40LT B lack 16 7 Light Connector
40RT Black 16
40T B lack 16 8 Diode
41 Pink 16
41A Pink 16 9 Wiper Motor Connector
41B Pink 16
42F Dk. Blue 16 10 Beacon/Strobe Harness (Opt.)
42FA Dk. Blue 16 6708318
46B Brown/Red 16
46H Brown 16 11 Rotating Beacon or Strobe Light (Opt.)
46L Brown/Yellow 16
46LA Brown/Yellow 16 12 Euro. Headlight Harness
46LF Brown/Yellow 16 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY) 6707672
46LF Yellow (L ight and 13 Right Turn Lamp (Opt.)
F lasher H arness) 16
46LR Brown/Yellow 16
46LT Brown/Yellow 16 14 Left Euro. Headlight
46R Brown/Green 16 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
46RA Brown/Green 16 15 L eft Turn Lamp
46RF Brown/Green 16 (O pt .)
46RF G reen (Light and
F lasher H arness) 16 16 Left Clearance Lamp
46RR Brown/Green 16 ( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
46RT Brown/Green 16
46T Brown 16 17 R ight Turn Lamp
63WP Orange/Black 16 (O pt.)
63WR Dk. Blue/Black 16
18 Right Clearance Lamp
( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
19 Right Euro. Headlight
( > Euro. Opt. ONLY)
20 Rear Cab Harness (Opt.)
6711160
21 F ront Flasher Harness (O pt .)
6710905
22 Left Turn Lamp (Opt.)
23 4-Way Flasher Harness (Opt.)
6709530 R ev. A
24 4-Way L ight Harness (Opt.)
6714213
25 F or F uture U se
26 L eft F lasher L ight (O pt.)
27 R ight Flasher Light (O pt .)
>NOT AVAILABLE DOMESTICALLY

CAB ACCESSORY WIRING DIAGRAM - SHEET 1 27 26 11
(Cab Accessory Harness 6710481 R ev. B)
TM
553 BICS (S/N 513012383-30999)
(S/N 513032570 AND ABOVE) 22 13
24 BA
B
A
46RF
46LF
19WPA
46B
40F
B 46RF
63WR
63WP
A 46LF
19LA
19WPA
46R
46H
46B
40A
12A
46L
19F
40B
12W
F 40F
1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 1 3 4 6 E 46B
40RT
46RT
OPTION
40LT
46LT
2 5 2 5 2 5 11
Shown in Shown in
46RT
OPTION
46LT
"OFF"
40T
"OFF"
3 Shown in
"OFF" 4 position 5 position 22
position 11 13
C
B
A
20 AB
C BA
10
OPTION
B
A
3 4 5
2
46B
40B
A B
6
C BA
21
A
B
XL 5 4 1 2 6 4 1 2 6 1 2
46B
40B
X AB CBA
E 46B
L
F 40B
40FB
46LF
A
46RF
E 46B
19LA
OPTION
19F
40FD
40A
46B
19WPA
19WPA
63WR
63WP
12W
46R
46H
40B
12A
46L
AB
CBA
46RT
46LT
B 46RF
40D
A
A
46LF
B
19LA
46H
46T
19L
C
B
A
F 40F
40C
12A
46RA
19F
46LA
11
14 19
46LF
40FB 15
46RF
40FD 17
8 AB
7 16
12 18
A
B
G 12W
46B
40B
41A
41
J
41A
F 46T 46B E
40FC
42FA
40FA
42FA
42F
E 46B
41B D
E 46RR D 41
1 D
C
46LR
42F 42F C C 42F
B 41B 46RF B B 46RF
A 19L 46LF A A 46LF
K 63WR F 40F
8 EUROPEAN OPTION ONLY
J 40 40F F
11
8
9 63WP
A B
46LF
40FB 15 46RF
40FD
17
B
A
23 25 16 18
46B
40B
40FA
41A
41A
41
E 46B
D 41
B 46RF
A 46LF
J Connects To J E ngine W iring Diagram - R efer to I ndex F 40F
OPTION
Printed in U.S.A.
MC 2278D (4-3-98)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
assistance in locating and correcting problems. Many of
the recommended procedures must be done by Instructions are necessary before operating or
authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only. servicing machine. Read Operation &
Maintenance Manuals, Handbook and signs
(decals) on machine. Follow warnings and
instructions in the manuals when making
repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for
correct function after adjustments, repairs or
service. Failure to follow instructions can
cause injury or death [A].
W–2003–1289
PROBLEM CAUSE
Battery will not take a charge. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Alternator will not charge. 1, 2, 5
Starter will not turn the engine. 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9
1. Alternator belt is loose or damaged.

2. Battery connections are dirty or loose.
3. Battery is damaged.
4. The ground connection is not making a good contact.

5. The alternator is damaged.
6. The engine is locked.
7. The starter is damaged.

8. The wiring or the solenoid is damaged.
9. Check the fuses.
553 Loader
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INFORMATION A 1
Description
The loader has a 12 volt, negative ground alternator
charging system. The electrical system is protected by 2
fuses (Item 1) [A] located in the engine compartment. The
fuses will protect the electrical system when there is an
electrical overload. The reason for the overload must be
found before starting the engine again.
Fuse Location
The electrical system for loaders is protected by seven
fuses located in the fuse block (Item 1) [A]. P–10748
Remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses (Item

1) [B] B
1
The decal located on the radiator/oil cooler housing, P–7254

specifies the fuse sizes used in the various electrical
circuits [C].
Relay Switches Location
C
The loader engine harness has relay switches (Item 2) [A]
located next to the fuses.
There are four relay switches (Item 2) [A] for the circuitry
on the loader.
The relay switches are for the starter, switch power, glow
plug and brake.
Replace a relay switch if the switch is malfunctioning.
Refer to the engine electrical wiring diagram at the
beginning of this section for correct wiring connections.
6707786
553 Loader
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Cont’d)
A 1
Removing and Installing The Battery
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and

skin on contact. Wear goggles, protective
clothing and rubber gloves to keep acid off
body.
In case of acid contact, wash immediately with P–10684
water. In case of eye contact get prompt medical
attention and wash eye with clean, cool water
for at least 15 minutes.
B 1
If electrolyte is taken internally drink large
quantities of water or milk! DO NOT induce
vomiting. Get prompt medical attention.
W–2065–1296
Open the rear door.

Disconnect the negative (–) battery cable (Item 1) [A].
Remove the battery holddown clamp (Item 1) [B].
P–10683
Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable (Item 1) [C]. C 1

Remove the battery from the loader.
P–10686
Always clean the battery terminals and cable ends when

installing a new battery [D]. D
Do not touch any metal parts with the battery terminals.
Connect and tighten the battery cables. Connect the
negative (–) cable last to prevent sparks.
Inspect the battery holddown to be sure that it is in good
condition. If it is cracked or broken, replace it.
Close the rear door.
P–09590 P–09589
553 Loader
ALTERNATOR
A
Alternator Belt Shield Removal and Installation
Stop the loader engine and open the rear door.
bottom of the alternator belt shield.
1
P–7090
Remove the engine harness mounting bolt and clamp

(Item 1) [B].
B
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 2) [B] from the side of the
alternator belt shield. 1
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 180–200

P–7098
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [C] from the top of the
alternator belt shield. C
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolt to 80–90 in.–lbs.
Remove the nut (Item 2) [C] from the stud on the engine.
Installation: Tighten the nut to 80–90 in.–lbs. (9–10 Nm)
torque. 1
Remove the alternator belt shield from the engine.
P–7093
553 Loader
ALTERNATOR (Cont’d)
A 2
1
Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
disconnected.
• Battery cables are connected when using a
fast charger or when welding on the loader P–7064
(Remove both cables from the battery).
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are
connected wrong.
I–2023–1285
B
1
Open the rear door. Disconnect the negative (–) battery
cable.
Disconnect the red wire (Item 1) [A] from the alternator.
Disconnect the wiring harness connector (Item 2) [A].
Loosen the adjustment bolt (Item 1) [B].
Remove the alternator belt. 2
Remove the adjustment bolt (Item 1) [B]. P–7089
Remove the mounting bolt, nut and spacer (Item 2) [B].

Remove the alternator. C
Adjusting the Alternator Belt
Remove the alternator belt shield (Page 6–6).
Loosen the alternator mounting bolt (Item 2) [B].
Loosen the adjustment bolt (Item 1) [B].
Move the alternator until the belt has 1/4 inch (6,4 mm)
movement [C] at the middle of the belt span with 5 lbs. P–7094
(22 N) or force.
Tighten the adjustment bolt and mounting bolt.
Reinstall the alternator belt shield (Page 6–6).
553 Loader
Alternator Output Test
A
1
death.
W–2017–0286
P–7064

Disconnect the negative (–) cable from the battery.
B Output
Terminal
Disconnect the red wire (Item 1) [A] from the alternator.
Connect that wire to the negative (–) side of the ammeter.
Connect the positive (+) side of the ammeter to the output
terminal on the alternator (Item 2) [A].
1
Disconnect the fuel stop solenoid connector.
Connect the negative (–) cable to the battery.
Regulator
Turn on the lights and crank the engine for 30 seconds to Terminal
discharge the battery.
P–1304
Connect the fuel stop solenoid, start the engine and run
at 2600 RPM.
The ammeter reading should be between 45–55 amps. at
2600 RPM.
If the reading is low, remove the screws and pull the
regulator cover away from the alternator.
Rectifier (Diode) Test
NOTE: The alternator is removed from the loader for

clarity purposes.

Install the wires in their original location on the back of the
alternator.
Connect a jumper wire (Item 1) [B] to the alternator output
terminal and the regulator terminal.
Connect the battery negative (–) cable.
Start the engine and run at 2600 RPM.
If the reading is within 45–55 amps. at 2600 RPM replace
the rectifier (diode) assembly or replace the alternator.
If the reading is low, do the Alternator Regulator Test.
553 Loader
A
Alternator Regulator Test
When an engine is running in an enclosed

area, fresh air must be added to avoid
concentration of exhaust fumes. If the engine
is stationary, vent the exhaust outside.
Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning.
P–7255
W–2050–1285
Connect the positive (+) voltmeter lead to the positive (+)

battery terminal (Item 1) [A].
B
Connect the negative (–) voltmeter lead to the negative
(–) battery terminal (Item 2) [A].
Start the engine and run at 1500–2000 RPM. Ground
Stud
The voltmeter should read between 13.9–14.7 volts.
If the reading is low stop the engine and disconnect the
battery negative (–) cable. Brush
Terminal
1
NOTE: The alternator is removed from the loader for
clarity purposes.
P–1364
Remove the wires from the back of the alternator.

Remove the regulator cover from the back of the
alternator.
Install the wires on the back of the alternator.
Connect a jumper wire (Item 1) [B] from the brush
terminal to the ground stud.
Connect the negative (–) battery cable and start the
engine. Run at 1500 RPM.
If the voltmeter reading is 14.7 or above replace the
regulator.
If the voltmeter reading is below 13.9, repair or replace the
alternator.
553 Loader
1. Nut 9. Rectifier (Diode)
Disassembly and Inspection – Parts Identification
A 2. Pulley 10. Case Half (Rear)
3. Fan 11. Condenser Assy.
Disassemble the alternator. (See Parts Identification [A].) 4. Bolt 12. Strap
5. Case Half (Front) 13. Regulator
Remove the regulator cover and regulator. 6. Bearing 14. Brush
7. Rotor 15. Cover
Remove the four bolts holding halves together. 8. Stator
Pry the halves apart (use a press if needed).

Use a soft jaw vise to hold rotor while removing pulley nut. 3
1 2
Remove front case half from the rotor using a plastic
hammer or press.
4 8
Unsolder the stator leads from the rectifier. Remove the
stator.
6 7
12
13
11 14
10
9
15 C–3312
Stator Continuity Test

B
Use an ohmmeter to test the stator.
Touch the probes to two of the bare stator wires [B].
Move one of the probes to the third wire.
The readings should be the same.
If there is no continuity, replace the stator.
P–1369
Stator Ground Test

C
Touch one probe to a bare stator lead and the other probe
to the bare metal surface of the stator [C].
There should be no continuity.
Replace the stator if there is continuity.
P–1386
553 Loader
A
Rotor Continuity Test
Touch the probes to the slip rings [A].
The ohmmeter should read between 3.065–33.85 ohms.
If there is no continuity replace the rotor.
P–1365
Rotor Ground Test

Touch one probe to one of the slip rings and the other
B
probe to the rotor shaft [B].
There should be no continuity.
Replace the rotor if there is continuity.
P–1378
Rectifier Continuity (Diode) Test
NOTE: In the diode tests there should be continuity

C
in one direction only. If the diode being
tested shows no continuity or continuity in
both directions, replace the rectifier
assembly.
Touch the probes to the terminals of each diode and read
the meter [C].
Reverse the probes to check the diode in the other
direction.
There should be continuity in one direction only.
P–1373
Touch one probe to the diode and the other probe to the
connected heatsink and read the meter [D]. D
Reverse the probes to check the diode in the other
direction.
There should be continuity in one direction only.
P–1370
553 Loader
Assembly
A
Reverse the order of disassembly.
Place the rotor in soft jaws when tightening the shaft nut.
Tighten to 50 ft.–lbs. (68 Nm) torque [A].
Install the rear case half and the remaining parts.
P–1808
553 Loader
STARTER
A
Disconnect the negative (–) and positive (+) cables from 1
the battery.
Installation: Make note of the wiring connections on the
starter solenoid to ensure correct installation.
Disconnect the wiring from the starter solenoid (Item 1)
[A].
P–7047
starter mounting bracket (Item 2) [B]. B
Installation: Tighten the bracket mounting bolts to 25–28
3
Remove the starter mounting bracket (Item 2) [B].
Loosen the mounting bolt (Item 3) [B] from the muffler
support bracket and turn the bracket
Remove the three (3) starter mounting bolts (Item 4) [B]. 4
Installation: Tighten the starter mounting bolts to 25–28
ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque. 2
1
P–7063
Checking the Starter

C
The key switch must be in the OFF position. Bat
S
The battery must be at full charge.
M
The cable connections on the battery must be clean and
tight.
Connect a jumper wire between S terminal and BAT Cranking
terminal [C]. Motor
If the starter turns but does not turn the engine, the starter
drive has a defect.
A–1991
Connect a jumper wire between the M terminal and the

BAT terminal [D]. D
If the starter turns, the defect is in the solenoid. Bat
S
If the starter does not turn, the starter is defective. M
Cranking
Motor
A–1992
553 Loader
STARTER (Cont’d)
Disassemble the starter as shown [A].
A 1
2.
Bolt
Frame
3. Brush
4. Holder
5. Field Housing
6. Field Coils
7. Solenoid
8. Spring
9. Plunger
10. Shift Lever
11. Gasket
12. Insulator
13. Armature
14. Drive
15. Snap Ring
7 16. Housing
1
2 8
9
3
4 5 11
10
6
12
13
1 16
15
14
D–1192
553 Loader
STARTER (Cont’d)
Cleaning and Inspection
A
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when

any of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
A–1995
W–2019–1285
Use a brush and air pressure to clean the drive, field coils, B
armature and starter housing.
NOTE: DO NOT use solvent to clean the drive

assembly. The solvent will remove the
lubricant and the drive will slip.
Check the following items:

Armature
Broken or burned insulation
Loose connections at commutator
Open or grounded circuits [A] & [B]
Worn shaft or bearings
Rough commutator A–1994
Brush Holders
Broken springs
Broken insulation
C
Spring tension
Field Coils
Broken or burned insulation
Electrical continuity [C]
Brush connections
Drive Gears
Worn teeth
Tooth engagement (drive gear must engage ring gear
by 1/2 the depth of the ring gear teeth)
B–2122
Replacing the Brushes D

Remove the screws at the brushes [D].
Remove the screws from the brush leads.
Install the new brushes and make sure to tighten the
screws.
Assembly: Reverse the order of disassembly. Put a
small amount of grease on the splines of the armature and
the bushings. Add or remove shims at the drive end of the
armature to adjust the end play.
B–9940
553 Loader
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A
Pry the rubber light mount loose from the operator cab
(both sides) [A].
P–3995
Lower the light from the operator cab and locate the (3)
instrument panel mounting bolts (Item 1) [B] (both sides). B
Remove the (3) mounting bolts (Item 1) [B]. 1
Installation: Be careful to not overtighten the instrument
panel mounting bolts to prevent stripping of the threaded
holes in the panels.
P–3955
Pull the left instrument panel down and disconnect the

wire harness connectors from the panel. Remove the
panel [C].
C
P–3951
Repeat steps [A] and [B]. Pull the right instrument panel
down and disconnect the wire harness connectors from D
the panel. Remove the panel [D].
Reverse the removal procedure to install the instrument
panel.
P–3953
553 Loader
FRONT LIGHTS
A
The front lights are mounted in the upper corners of the
operator cab [A].
P–3956
Pry the rubber light mount free from the operator cab [B]. B
P–3995
Pull the light down and remove the (3) mounting bolts
(Item 1) [C] from the instrument panel. C
Disconnect the front light connector from the instrument 1
panel. Remove the front light from the operator cab.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the front light.
P–3955
553 Loader
ENGINE SERVICE
Page
Number
AIR CLEANER
BLOWER FAN HOUSING
CYLINDER HEAD
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
Servicing the Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
ENGINE
ENGINE COMPRESSION
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
ENGINE MUFFLER
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
Linkage Bar Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
FLYWHEEL
Flywheel Ring Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
ENGINE
FUEL FILTER SERVICE
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
FUEL INJECTION NOZZLES
Checking the Injector Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Checking the Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
Timing the Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
GLOW PLUGS
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
OIL PUMP
Servicing the Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
553 Loader
ENGINE SERVICE (Cont’d)
Page
Number
PISTONS AND CRANKSHAFT
Crankshaft Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
Piston and Crankshaft Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
Piston Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
Servicing the Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
Servicing the Cylinder Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
Servicing the Pistons and Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
RADIATOR
TIMING GEARS AND CAMSHAFT
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
Servicing the Timing Gear and the Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
TIMING GEARCASE COVER
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
TROUBLESHOOTING
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
U–JOINT COUPLER
Disassemlby and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
WATER PUMP
553 Loader
ENGINE SERVICE
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following troubleshooting chart is provided for assistance in locating and correcting problems which are most common.
Many of the recommended procedures must be done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only.
PROBLEM CAUSE
Slow cranking speed. 1, 2, 3, 4

Engine will not start. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 30,
31, 32
Difficult to start. 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 28,
30, 31, 32
No power for engine. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 30,
31, 32
Engine is mis–firing. 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 20, 24, 25, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32
Too much fuel consumption. 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32
Black exhaust. 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32
Blue/white exhaust. 4, 16, 18, 19, 20, 24, 26, 30, 32, 33, 34, 44, 54
Low oil pressure. 4, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 41, 42, 43, 56
Engine knocking. 9, 14, 16, 18, 19, 22, 25, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 35, 44, 45, 57
Engine running rough. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 20, 21, 25, 27, 28, 29, 32, 34, 44, 57
Vibration. 13, 14, 20, 24, 25, 28, 29, 32, 44, 47
High oil pressure. 4, 37, 40
Overheating. 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 23, 24, 44, 46, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 55
Too much crankcase pressure. 24, 30, 32, 33, 44, 53

Poor compression. 11, 19, 24, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 45, 57
Start and stop. 10, 11, 12
553 Loader
TROUBLESHOOTING (Cont’d)

1. Battery capacity low. 30. Worn cylinder bores.
2. Bad electrical connections. 31. Worn valve and seats.
3. Faulty starter motor. 32. Broken, worn or sticking piston rings.
4. Incorrect grade of oil. 33. Worn valve stems or guides.
5. Low cranking speed. 34. Overly full air cleaner.
6. Fuel tank empty. 35. Worn or damaged bearings.
7. Faulty stop control operation. 36. Not enough oil in the crankcase.
8. Plugged fuel line. 37. Gauge is not correct.
9. Plugged fuel lift pump. 38. Oil pump worn.
10. Plugged fuel filter. 39. Pressure relief valve is open.
11. Restriction in the air cleaner. 40. Pressure relief valve is sticking closed.
12. Air in the fuel system. 41. Broken relief valve spring.
13. Faulty fuel injection pump. 41. Faulty suction pipe.
14. Faulty fuel injectors. 43. Plugged oil filter.
15. Incorrect use of the glow plugs. 44. Piston seizure.
16. Glow plugs not working. 45. Incorrect piston height.
17. Broken fuel injection pump drive. 46. Damaged fan.
18. Incorrect fuel pump timing. 47. Faulty engine mounting.
19. Incorrect valve timing. 48. Faulty thermostat.
20. Poor compression. 49. Restriction in water jacket.
21. Plugged fuel tank vent. 50. Loose fan belt.
22. Incorrect type or grade of fuel. 51. Plugged radiator.
23. Exhaust pipe restriction. 52. Faulty water pump.
24. Cylinder head gasket leaking. 53. Plugged breather pipe.
25. Overheating. 54. Valve stem seals damaged.
26. Cold running. 55. Coolant level low.
27. Incorrect tappet adjustment. 56. Plugged oil pump pipe strainer.
28. Sticking valves 57. Broken valve spring.
29. Incorrect high pressure tubelines.
553 Loader
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL
A
device (Page 1–1).
1
Raise the operator cab (Page 1–1).
Remove the (2) mounting bolts (Item 1) [A] and nuts from
the speed control mounting bracket.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts evenly 1
until the speed control lever moves back and forth at a
comfortable tension.
P–5929
Pull the speed control away from the loader frame and
disconnect the speed control rod (Item 1) [B] from the
B
control.
Installation: Be sure to install the control rod in the
bottom hole of the speed control.
P–5929
Installation: Install the stop bracket (Item 1) [C] in the

same location. It is necessary for the front and rear stop
C
on the bracket to be located correctly.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the engine
speed control. 1
Disassembly
Loosen the (2) control lever mounting bolts (Item 2) [A] 2
and remove the mounting nuts (Item 2) [C].
Assembly: Do not lubricate the engine speed control.
Replace any worn or damaged parts if necessary.
P–4068
553 Loader
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (Cont’d)
Linkage Bar Removal and Installation
A
1–1.)
1 2
Remove the radiator/oil cooler assembly. (See Page
7–9.)
Remove the engine from the loader. (See Page 7–12.)
P–7077
Remove the blower fan housing from the loader. (See
Page 7–18.)
The engine speed control linkage bar (Item 1) [A] is
B
located between the hydrostatic pump assembly and the
blower fan housing.
Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) [B] from the linkage

bar pivot point.
Installation: Tighten the pivot mounting nut to 180–200
in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque. 1
Lower the linkage bar and remove the two (2) washers.
Disconnect the bar from the engine speed control rod
(Item 2) [A] and remove the linkage bar. P–7075
Reverse the removal procedure to install the linkage bar.
553 Loader
RADIATOR
A
Stop the engine and allow the engine to cool.
Raise the lift arms and install an approved lift arm
2
Drain the hydraulic oil reservoir. (See Page 1–1.)
Lower the operator cab after the hydraulic reservoir is
drained. 1
P–7031
B 2
1
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is
hot. You can be seriously burned.
W–2070–1285
Open the rear door.

Remove the rear grill. (See Page 5–1.)
Drain the coolant from the radiator. (See Page 1–1.)
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts (Item 1) [A] from the P–7026
rear radiator shield (Item 2) [A].
C
Remove the rear radiator shield (Item 2) [A].
Disconnect the radiator overflow hose (Item 1) [B] from

the radiator filler neck.
Remove the clamp (Item 2) [B] and mounting nut from the
front of the radiator housing. 1 1
Remove the overflow hose (Item 1) [B] from the radiator
housing.
P–7030
Disconnect the inlet and outlet hoses (Items 1) [C] from
the radiator.
D
Remove the two (2) rear radiator mounting bolts (Item 1)
[D] from the engine blower housing.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts 105–130 in.–lbs.
P–7028
553 Loader
RADIATOR (Cont’d)
A
1
I–2003–0284
Disconnect the inlet tubeline (Item 1) [A] from the oil B

cooler.
Disconnect the outlet tubeline (Item 1) [B] from the oil

cooler.
P–7033
Remove the two (2) mounting nuts (Item 1) [C] from the
radiator housing. C
Installation: Tighten the mounting nuts to 180–200 1
P–7032
Remove the radiator/oil cooler and housing assembly

(Item 1) [D] from the loader. D
Remove the two (2) front radiator mounting bolts (Item 2)
[D] from the housing. 1

Remove the radiator from the housing.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the radiator in
the loader.
2
P–7035
553 Loader
ENGINE MUFFLER
A
Stop the engine and allow the engine and muffler to cool.
Open the rear door.
1
Remove the mounting bolt and nut (Item 1) [A] from the
muffler support bracket.
P–7047
Remove the four (4) mounting nuts (Item 1) [B] from the
muffler bracket (Item 2) [B]. B
Installation: Tighten the mounting nuts to 190–240 2
Remove the muffler from the loader.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the muffler.
P–7045
AIR CLEANER
Removal and Installation C 1
Remove the hose (Item 1) [C] from the air cleaner that is
connected to the intake manifold on the engine.
NOTE: The intake hose (Item 2) [C] is removed for 2

clarity purpose only in photo [D].
P–7039
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [D] and nuts
from the air cleaner. D
Remove the air cleaner from the loader.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the air cleaner.
P–7037
553 Loader
FUEL FILTER
A
Turn off the fuel shut off valve at the fuel tank.
Clean the area around the filter thoroughly.
Turn the thumb screw (Item 1) [A] at the bottom of the fuel
filter and drain the fuel from the filter.
1
P–7041
Hold the nut (Item 1) [B] on the top of the fuel filter and
remove the thumb screw from the bottom of the filter. B
Remove the filter bowl and filter element.
2
Disconnect the inlet and outlet hoses (Items 2) [B] from
the filter head.
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts and nuts (Item 3) [B]
from the filter head.
1
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts and nuts to
180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque.
3
Check the condition of the seals in the filter and replace 2
if necessary.
P–7042
Reverse the removal procedure to install the fuel filter
element, bowl, and filter head.
553 Loader
ENGINE
A
Install jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.
(See Page 1–1.)
1
Remove the battery from the engine compartment. (See
Page 6–1.)
Remove the air cleaner from the loader. (See Page 7–10.)
P–7043
Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. (See
Page 1–1.)
Disconnect the engine speed control linkage (Item 1) [A]
B 1
from the throttle linkage on the engine.
Disconnect the fuel priming bulb (Item 1) [B] at the supply

hose from the fuel tank.
Plug both of the disconnected hoses. 3
2
Make note of the supply hose routing from the fuel tank
and remove the hose from the engine.
Disconnect the fuel supply hose (Item 2) [B] from the fuel
pump (Item 3) [B] on the engine.
P–7046
Plug the hose and cap the fuel pump port.
Disconnect the engine harness clamp (Item 1) [C] and C

wires from the harness, from the alternator belt shield.
P–7057
Disconnect the glow plug preheat wire (Item 1) [D] from

the glow plug rail on the engine.
D
P–7066
553 Loader
ENGINE (Cont’d)
A
2
Disconnect the red wire (Item 1) [A] and the harness
connector (Item 2) [A] from the alternator.
P–7064
Disconnect the engine harness clamp (Item 1) [B] from

the thermostat housing.
B
1
Disconnect the wire from the coolant temperature sensor

(Item 2) [B].
P–7093
Disconnect the radiator hose (Item 1) [C] from the

thermostat housing. C
2
Disconnect the radiator hose (Item 2) [C] from inlet of the
radiator. 1
P–7061
Disconnect the harness clamp (Item 1) [D] from the

bracket attached to the water pump. D
Disconnect the wiring from the starter solenoid (Item 2)
[D].
Installation: Make note of the solenoid wiring 2
connections to ensure correct installation.
P–7060
553 Loader
ENGINE (Cont’d)
A
Disconnect the harness wire from the engine oil pressure
switch (Item 1) [A].
1
P–7059
Disconnect the wiring harness clamp (Item 1) [B] located

above the starter solenoid (Item 2) [B], from the starter
B
mounting plate.
P–7056
Disconnect the engine harness connector (Item 1) [C]

from the rear tail light harness. C
P–7058
Disconnect the engine to frame ground cable (Item 1) [D] D

from the loader frame.
Remove the two (2) engine mounting bolts (Item 2) [D],
nuts, and washers from the right side engine mounting
brackets. 2
Tighten the engine mounting bolts to 65–70 ft.–lbs.
2
P–7062
553 Loader
ENGINE (Cont’d)
A
Remove the two (2) engine mounting bolts (Item 1) [A],
nuts, and washers from the left side engine mounting
brackets.
1 1
P–7065
Attach a chain (Item 1) [B], aproximately 24 inches (610

mm) in length, with a hook on each end, to each lift eye
B
(Item 2) [B] on the engine.
Install a 3/8” bolt (Item 3) [B] in the chain as shown so the
lifting position of the chain hoist is located behind the
radiator housing. 1
3 2
Use a washer on each side of the chain and fasten the
3/8” bolt with a nut.
2
P–7069
Lift the engine slowly with the chain hoist until the rear
engine mounts clear the rear lip of the loader frame [C].
C
Pull the engine out of the engine compartment [C].
Be sure the front engine mounts clear the rear lip of the
loader frame as the engine is removed.
Replace the engine mounts if they are worn or damaged.
Installation: Use a punch to align the engine mounts with
the mounting holes in the loader frame.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the engine in the
loader.
P–7072
553 Loader
U–JOINT COUPLER
A
NOTE: For procedures requiring the use of LOCTITE 1
adhesive, thoroughly clean and dry affected
parts before the application of LOCTITE. 3
(See Page 3–1.)
2
u–joint coupler assembly (Item 2) [A].
Assembly: Apply (LOCTITE #242) liquid adhesive and
Nm) torque. P–7079
Remove the coupler assembly from the coupler mounting

flange (Item 3) [A].
B
Assembly: If the coupler assembly mounting flange
needs to be replaced, apply (LOCTITE #242) liquid 2
adhesive to the four (4) mounting bolts and tighten to
25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38 Nm) torque.
1
Disassemly and Assembly 3
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [B] from the
first spider (Item 2) [B] of the u–joint coupler assembly.
Assembly: Apply (LOCTITE #242) liquid adhesive and
Nm) torque. P–7085
NOTE: Be sure to align the three grease fittings (Item

3) [B] on the same side of the assembly. C
Remove the spider coupling (Item 1) [C] from the second
spider of the assembly. 1
P–7088
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [D] from the
second spider (Item 2) [D] from the hydrostatic pump
coupler (Item 3) [D].
D
Assembly: Apply LOCTITE #242 liquid adhesive and 2
Nm) torque.
P–7091
553 Loader
FLYWHEEL
A
Install the jackstands under the rear of the loader. (See
Page 1–1.)
1
Remove the u–joint drive coupler assembly (Item 1) [A].
(See Page 7–16.)
P–7079
Remove the four (4) mounting bolts (Item 1) [B] from the
blower fan (Item 2) [B].
B
Installation: Apply (LOCTITE #242) liquid adhesive to
the mounting bolts and tighten to 25–28 ft.–lbs. (34–38
Nm) torque.
Remove the blower fan (Item 2) [B] from the engine
flywheel.
P–7080
Remove the five (5) flywheel mounting bolts (Item 1) [C]

from the flywheel. C
Installation: Apply (LOCTITE #242) liquid adhesive to
the mounting bolts and tighten to 40–45 ft.–lbs. (54–61
Nm) torque.
Remove the flywheel from the crankshaft.
1
Reverse the removal procedure to install the flywheel on
the engine crankshaft.
P–7082
Flywheel Ring Gear

D 1
The ring gear (Item 1) [D] is installed on the flywheel with
and interference fit. To remove the ring gear, heat the ring
gear enough to expand the gear. Hit the ring gear evenly
around the gear to remove it from the flywheel.
Clean the outer surface of the flywheel thoroughly so the
new ring gear will fit smoothly onto the flywheel.
Clean the new ring gear and heat it to a temperature of
450° –500° (232° – 260° C).
Fit the ring gear on the flywheel and be sure the gear is
seated correctly.
P–7083
553 Loader
BLOWER FAN HOUSING
A
1–1.)
1
Remove the radiator/oil cooler assembly from the loader.
(See Page 7–8.)
P–7036
Remove the mounting nut (Item 1) [A] from the top of the
blower fan housing.
B
Remove the fuel hose (Item 1) [B] from the hanger
mounted on the housing.
P–7070
Remove the fastener (Item 1) [C] from the bottom of the

blower housing. C
NOTE: The hole (Item 2) [C] located at the bottom of
the blower housing should be kept clean. 2
The hole will keep moisture or residue from
collecting in the bottom of the housing.
P–7068
Remove the fastener (Inset) [D] from the blower fan

housing. Use a hammer and punch to remove the center D
bullet from the outer fastener.
Installation: Install the outer fastener in the hole in the
bottom of the housing and through the hole in the loader
frame. Put the bullet into the outer fastener and punch the P–7078
bullet into the outer fastener to spread the fastener. Install
the bullet into the fastener so the two parts are flush with
each other.
Remove the blower fan housing from the loader.
P–7067
553 Loader
ENGINE COMPRESSION
Checking
A
procedure:
MEL10630 – Engine Compression Kit
Warm the engine.
Remove the fuel injector nozzles from the engine. (See
Page 7–28.)
Install the compression adapter in the cylinder head [A].
B–6321
Connect the compression gauge to the adapter [B].

Turn the engine with the starter at 200 at 300 RPM. Run
B
the test for each cylinder two times at 5 to 10 seconds
each time and take the average reading.
The correct compression for the engine is 337–448 PSI
(2324–3089 kPa) with no more than 10% difference
between the cylinders.
B–6322
553 Loader
GLOW PLUGS
Checking
A
Disconnect the glow plug cables and wires.
Use an ohmmeter to check the glow plugs [A].
P–4304
Touch one probe to the end of the glow plug and the other
probe to the body of glow plug [B].
B
The reading must be between 1 and 2 ohms [A]. If the
resistance is infinite, the coil of the glow plug is broken.
Repeat the procedure for each glow plug.
P–4310
Replace each glow plug as needed [C].

C
P–3420
553 Loader
GLOW PLUGS (Cont’d)
A 2

Disconnect the engine harness wire (Item 1) [A] from the
glow plug. 3
Remove the nut (Item 2) [A] from the top of each glow
plug.
Remove the glow plug connecting straps (Item 3) [A]. 1 2
P–7256
Loosen and remove the glow plugs (Item 1) [B]. B
P–7257
Photo [C] shows the glow plug assembly removed from

the engine. Inspect the glow plugs and replace when C
necessary.
P–4307
553 Loader
FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Checking the Injection Pump
A
The injection pump contains parts which have a very
close tolerance and its operation has a direct effect on the
performance of the engine.
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure

can penetrate skin or eyes causing serious B–5959
injury. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be
visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood to
find leaks. Do not use your bare hand. Wear
safety goggles. If fluid enters skin or eyes, get B
immediate medical attention.
W–2074–1285

procedure:
MEL1237 – Adapter Fuel Line
MEL1173A – Pressure Gauge 1
To check the initial discharge pressure, remove a high 3

pressure tubeline from the fuel injection pump [A]. 2
Loosen the other end of the tubeline at the injector, so that

the tubeline can be turned away from the fitting. B–8235
Connect a pressure gauge to the long leg of the test

tubeline (Item 1 & 2) [B] and tighten.
Connect the short leg of the tubeline to the fitting at the
fuel injection pump (Item 3) [B].
Rotate the engine, with the starter, to increase the
pressure 2133 PSI (14707 kPa). Align the plunger with
T.D.C.
With the pressure at 2133 PSI (14707 kPa), it should hold
this for 5 seconds or more.
If the time is less than the allowable limit, replace the
injection pump.
553 Loader
FUEL INJECTION PUMP (Cont’d)
A
Let the engine cool and clean the area around the
injection pump thoroughly.
Disconnect the high pressure fuel lines from the fuel
injectors [A].
B–5958
Disconnect the high pressure fuel lines from the injection

pump [B].
B
B–5959
Disconnect the engine harness wire (Item 1) [C] from the

glow plugs. C
B–5960
Remove the mounting bolts from the intake manifold

(Item 1) [D]. D
B–5962
553 Loader
A
Remove the intake manifold from the engine [A].
Installation: Replace the manifold gasket.
B–5963
Disconnect the fuel inlet hose (Item 1) [B] and the fuel
return hose (Item 2) [B] from the injection pump.
B
2
B–5964
Remove the engine lift eye (Item 1) [C] from the engine
block. C
Remove the four (4) injection pump mounting bolts (Item
2) [C].
1
Remove the injection pump from the engine.
2
B–5965
553 Loader
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–EngineServiceSectionPart1of3

A
Do not attempt to maintain or adjust unless

you are trained and have the correct
equipment.
I–2028–0289
P–4363
Installation: Remove the side cover (Item 1) [A] from the
injection pump chamber.
Be sure the spring (Item 1) [B] is located in the injection B
pump chamber as shown.
P–4362
Install the shim(s) (Item 1) [C] on the injection pump

mounting surface. Refer to timing the injection pump C
Page 7–26 for information on number of shims used.
1
P–4364
Install the injection pump in the engine.

Put the pin (Item 1) [D] on the control rack in the slot of
D
the fork lever (Item 2) [D] located inside the injection
pump chamber. 1
If the pin is not correctly installed in the fork

lever, the engine will run over maximum speed, 2
resulting in serious damage to the engine.
I–2086–1095
P–4360
553 Loader
A
Timing the Injection Pump
2
Do not attempt to maintain or adjust unless
you are trained and have the correct
equipment. 1
I–2028–0289
Timing the injection pump is done by changing the P–7258

number of shims between the injection pump and the
injection pump mounting surface.
Disconnect the fuel shut off cable (Item 1) [A] from the
B
injection pump.
Turn the fuel supply lever (Item 2) [A] to the ON position 2
(to the right).
Disconnect the number one cylinder high pressure line

(Item 1) [B] from the injection pump.
Install a short plastic tube (Item 2) [B] in the number one
cylinder port of the injection pump. The tube should fit 1
tight in the port and point upward.
B–10007 P–4361
Turn the crankshaft (Item 1) [C] to rotate the engine in the

direction shown (clockwise viewed from rear of loader).
C
Continue rotating the engine until the fuel injection timing
mark (on the crankshaft pulley), is aligned with the pointer
(Item 2) [C].
NOTE: The crankshaft pulley (Item 3) [C] has two
timing marks. The first mark to appear on the 1
crankshaft pulley (with the rotation shown),
is fuel injection timing. The second mark
(Item 1) [D] aligned with the pointer is the 2
T.D.C. timing mark.
Rotate slowly until fuel just starts to flow upward into the
3
plastic tube (Item 2) [B]. P–7087
At this instant, the pointer should be aligned within the fuel

injection mark [C]. The correct timing for the engine is
23°–25° degrees B.T.D.C.
D 1
P–7081
553 Loader
A
Timing the Injection Pump (Cont’d)
1
Add or subtract shim(s) (Item 1) [A] as needed to adjust
the fuel delivery timing.
NOTE: Add or remove one (1) shim to vary the timing

by 1.5°. Adding shims retards the timing.
P–4364
553 Loader
FUEL INJECTOR NOZZLES
A
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure

can penetrate skin or eyes causing serious
injury. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be
visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood to
find leaks. Do not use your bare hand. Wear
safety goggles. If fluid enters skin or eyes, get
immediate medical attention.
W–2074–1285
B–5958
These are some engine problems caused by damaged

injector nozzles. B
• The engine is hard to start or will not start.
• Engine operation is not smooth.
• The engine will not idle correctly.
• Bad engine performance.
• The engine exhaust smoke is black, white or blue.
Remove the injector nozzles from the engine and test the
injectors only after engine performance shows that there
may be damage.
Removal
To remove the injector nozzles, use the following
procedure:
B–5969
Remove the high pressure tubelines from the injectors
[A]. Remove the valve cover.
Remove the fuel return hoses from the banjo fittings.
C
Remove the banjo fittings from the fuel injector nozzles
[B].
Loosen the fuel injector with a special socket [C].
Remove the fuel injector nozzle from the engine [D].
B–5970
Do not disassemble or test the fuel injector
nozzles unless you have the correct service
and testing tools.
I–2027–0284 D
Installation
Install the injector nozzle in the cylinder head and tighten
Install the banjo fitting on the injector nozzle and tighten.
Connect the return fuel hoses to the banjo fitting.
Install the high pressure tubelines at the injector and
tighten.
Remove the air from the fuel system. (See Page 1–1 for
the correct procedure.) B–5971
553 Loader
FUEL INJECTOR NOZZLES (Cont’d)
Checking Fuel Injector Nozzles
A
procedure:
MEL10018 – Injector Nozzle Tester
MEL10019 – Accessory Set
NOTE: You can adjust the release pressure of the
injector nozzle by adding or removing 3
spacers (Item 1) [A] from the top of the nozzle 2
spring (Item 2) [A]. Each spacer will change
the release pressure about 142 PSI (980 kPa). 1
The release pressure must be 1990–2133 PSI
(13721–14707 kPa). B–4103
Keep away from fuel under pressure in injector

system. It may not be visible. Wear safety
goggles. Fuel under pressure can penetrate
skin or eyes causing serious injury. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical
attention. W–2072–1285
Connect the injector nozzle to the tester with the nozzle

in the down position [B].
A–2513
Slowly operate the hand lever of the test pump until the
injector nozzle valve opens. The pressure must be
1990–2133 PSI (13721–14707 kPa). C Spring
If the pressure is not correct, disassemble the injector CORRECT WRONG

nozzle and add or remove spacers (Item 1) [A]. Pressure
Pin
NOTE: When assembling the injector nozzle, tighten Holder
the retainer nut (Item 3) [A] to 43–58 ft.–lbs.
(59–79 Nm) torque. Any higher torque will Nozzle
cause slow action of the valve. Body
Check for inside leakage. Operate the hand lever until the Needle
pressure is almost enough to open the injector valve. Valve
Make a record of the pressure. Release the hand lever.
Check the pressure decrease to 10 seconds. The nozzle
has damage if the pressure decrease is more than 740
PSI (5162 kPa) in 10 seconds. A–2621
Check the spray pattern of the nozzle for the following

conditions [C]:
Fuel comes out the side of the nozzle.
Has fuel drops coming from the nozzle.
Has a flow (solid stream) coming from the nozzle.
Any of the above conditions show a defect or a dirty
injector nozzle. Clean the nozzle that does not operate
correctly and check again.
553 Loader
CYLINDER HEAD
A
Removal
NOTE: For easier removal of the cylinder head the
engine can be removed from the loader. (See
Page 7–12.)
procedure:
MEL1181 – Nozzle Socket
Remove the nuts from the valve cover.
Remove the valve cover [A].
B–5094
Disconnect the fuel injection tubelines [B]. B
B–5882
Remove the injector nozzles and the copper gaskets [C].

C
Remove the intake manifold.
Remove the belt shield.
Remove the alternator.
B–4091
Remove the rocker arms [D].

D
Remove the valve rotators.
B–5093
553 Loader
CYLINDER HEAD (Cont’d)
A
Removal (Cont’d)
Remove the push rods [A].
Remove the water return pipe.
Remove the cylinder head bolts.
B–5881
Remove the cylinder head from the engine block [B].

B
B–5101
Remove the head gasket and the O–ring from the engine
block [C]. C
NOTE: There may be a shim under the cylinder head
gasket. Use the shim over again or replace it
with the same size shim.
B–5886
553 Loader
Installation
A
Install a new O–ring on the engine block [A].
B–5890
Install a new head gasket and shim if there was a shim

removed [B]. B
Install the cylinder head on the engine block.
B–5886
Put oil on the cylinder head bolts and nuts and tighten to
29–33 ft.–lbs. (40–45 Nm) torque. Use the tightening
sequence as shown in [C]. C
Lower the piston which is to be measured for the
clearance between the cylinder head and the piston.
Put a piece of solder in the injector port [D]. Make sure the
solder does not touch the valves.
Turn the engine with your hand until the piston goes over
T.D.C.
Remove the solder and measure it. The thickness must
be 0.024–0.31’’ (0,6–0,8 mm). If not remove the cylinder
head and install the correct shim between the cylinder A–2773
head and the engine block.
Install the push rods.
D
Install the rocker arms.
Install the alternator, belt and shield.
Install the intake manifold.
Install the injector nozzles with a new copper gasket. (See
Page 7–28.)
Install the injector high pressure tubelines.
B–4068
553 Loader
Installation (Cont’d)
A
Adjust the valve clearance [A].
B–5893
Make sure the piston is at T.D.C when making the

adjustment and adjust the clearance to 0.0057’’–0.0073’’
B 0.0057–0.0073 in.
(0,145–0,185 mm)
(0,145–0,185 mm) cold [B].
Install the valve cover with a new gasket.
NOTE: Retighten the cylinder head bolts and nuts to

the correct torque after the engine as been
operated for 30 minutes.
A–2730
553 Loader
A
Disassembly
procedure:
MEL10121 – Valve Tool
Using the valve compression tool [A], remove the valve
cap and the valve spring collet [B].
Remove the valve spring.
Remove the seal on the valve and remove the valve from
the cylinder head.
B–5889
Repeat this procedure for all the valves.
Valve Spring
Retainer
Cap
Seal
Collets B–4122
Remove the thermostat housing and the thermostat from

the cylinder head [C]. C
Assembly
Install the valves.
Put oil on the valve seal and install the valve seal on the
valve.
Install the valve spring and the retainer.
Install the spring collet and the valve cap.
Install the thermostat.
B–3643
Install a new gasket and the thermostat housing.
553 Loader
A
Servicing the Cylinder Head
Clean the surface of the cylinder head.
Put a straight edge on the cylinder head [A].
NOTE: Do not put the straight edge across the

combustion chamber.
Put a feeler gauge between the straight edge and the

surface of the cylinder head.
The maximum distortion of the cylinder head surface is + A–2735
0.002’’ (+ 0.05 mm).
If the measurement is more than the specification,
remove the combustion chambers then grind the cylinder B
head. Grind the same amount of material from the bottom
of the combustion chambers as was removed from the
head.
Clean the surface of the valve seat area.
Measure the width of the valve seat [B].
The correct width of the valve seat is 0.083’’ (2,1 mm) and
the seat angle is 45 degrees.
B–3632
Use the following steps to grind the valve seats [C]. C Valve Contacting
C A D Width
Item A – Use a 45° cutter to grind the surface of the valve .083’’ (2,1 mm)
seat.
B
Item B – Use a 15° cutter to grind the front surface of the
valve seat.
Item C – Use A 65° or 70° cutter to grind the rear surface
of the valve seat to finish the seat of a 0.083’’ (2,1 mm) D
width. Corrected
Surface of Uncorrected
Item D – Grind the valve surface to a 45° angle. Valve Seat Surface of
A – 45° cutter Valve Seat
B – 15° cutter
C – 65° or 70° cutter
D – 45° valve surface MC–2185
Install the valve in the seat and check the depth [D].
D
The specification for the depth of the valve is
0.035–0.043’’ (0,9–1,1 mm).
NOTE: If the measurement is more than the

specifications add the correct thickness
washer under the valve spring to keep the
correct tension on the spring.
B–3634
553 Loader
Servicing the Cylinder Head (Cont’d)
A
Clean the valve guide.
Install the valve in the cylinder head.
Install a dial indicator gauge.
Measure the clearance of the valve guide and the valve
[A].
The measurement must be 0.0014–0.0026’’
(0,035–0,065 mm). Replace the valve guide and valves
as needed.
B–3698
Measure the valve spring [B]. The length of the spring

must be 1.382–1.402’’ (35,1–35,6 mm). Replace the
B
valve spring if it does not meet the specification.
B–3696
Check the valve spring with a square to make sure it is

straight [C]. Replace the spring if it is not straight. C
B–3680
Put the valve spring in a tester [D].

D
A–2759
553 Loader
Servicing the Cylinder Head (Cont’d)
A
Push down on the spring 1.22’’ (31 mm). The
compression load must be 16.5 lbs. (7,49 kg). Replace
the valve spring if it does not meet these specifications.
Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm bushing
and the shaft diameter [A].
The inside diameter of the rocker arm bushing is
0.4330–04340’’ (10,997–11,038 mm). The rocker arm
shaft diameter is 0.4320–0.4324’’ (10,973–10,984 mm).
If the measurements are not within the specifications,
replace the parts as needed.
B–3697
NOTE: If cylinder head is to be replaced, screw plugs
must be installed before assembly.
553 Loader
TIMING GEARCASE COVER
Removal
A
Remove the cylinder head. (See Page 7–30.) Remove
the tappets from the engine block [A]. Remove the
starter. (See Page 6–1.)
Remove the fuel injection pump. (See Page 7–23.)
B–5092
Remove the governor spring from the governor fork [B]. B
B–3676
Remove the plate for the speed control and the governor
spring [C].
C
B–3647
553 Loader
TIMING GEARCASE COVER (Cont’d)
Removal (Cont’d)
A
Remove the start spring from the gearcase [A].
Straighten the lock washer on the crankshaft sheave.
Remove the nut and washer.
B–3678
Remove the crankshaft [B]. B

Remove the key.
Remove the bolts from the gearcase.
B–5896
Remove the gearcase and the O–ring [C].

C
B–5895
553 Loader
TIMING GEARCASE COVER (Cont’d)
Installation
A
Install the three O–rings and the oil seal in the gearcase
cover [A]. Put oil on the oil seal.
Put non–drying adhesive on the edge of the gearcase
cover.
Install the gearcase cover and tighten the bolts to 13–15
Oil Seal
B–3617
Install the start spring [B].

B
B–3678
Install the speed control plate and the governor spring

[C].
C
NOTE: Make sure you do not drop the governor
spring into the gearcase.
B–3647
Connect the governor spring [D].

D
See Page 7–23 to install the fuel injection pump.
See Page 7–32 to install the cylinder head on the engine
block.
See Page 7–12 to install the engine in the loader.
B–3676
553 Loader
TIMING GEARS AND CAMSHAFT (Cont’d)
Removal
A
Remove the crankshaft collar, O–ring, oil slinger and the
gear collar [A].
B–3637
Remove the snap ring on the idler gear [B]. B
B–5918
Remove the idler gear [C].

C
Remove the idler collar from the shaft.
Align the hole in the gear on the camshaft with the stop
plate bolts.
B–3699
Remove the bolts from the camshaft stop [D].

D
B–5930
553 Loader
Removal (Cont’d)
A
Remove the camshaft [A].
Remove the 2 bolts that hold the fork lever on the fuel
camshaft.
B–3655
Remove the fork lever [B]. B
B–5919
Remove the stop for the fuel camshaft (Item 1) [C].

C 1
Remove the fuel camshaft and gear (Item 2) [C].
Straighten the washer on the gear of the oil pump.
Remove the bolt from the oil pump gear.
B–5922
Remove the pump gear [D].

D
B–5923
553 Loader
Removal (Cont’d)
A
Remove the oil pump bolts and the oil pump [A].
B–5925
Remove the crankshaft gear [B]. B

Remove the key.
B–3686
553 Loader
Installation
A
Install the oil pump and tighten the bolts to 5–6 ft.–lbs.
(8–9 Nm) torque [A].
Install the gear and tighten the nut to 22–30 ft.–lbs.
Install the key and gear on the camshaft.
B–3658
Install the fuel camshaft and fork lever [B]. B

Install the stop bolt on the fork lever and tighten to 5–6
Install the bolts and tighten to 13–15 ft.–lbs. (18–21 Nm)
torque.
B–3649
Install the camshaft and tighten the bolts to 14–15 ft.–lbs.

(18–21 Nm) torque [C]. C
B–3655
Install the idler gear [D].

D
B–3699
553 Loader
Installation (Cont’d)
A
The timing marks must be in correct alignment [A]. Gear
backlash is .0017–.0045’’ (0,043–0,114 mm). The
allowable limit is .0079’’ (0,2 mm).
Install the snap ring on the idler gear shaft.
B–5927
Install the oil slinger. Put oil on the O–ring and install the
O–ring and the collar [B].
B
B–3637
Servicing the Timing Gear and the Camshaft

C
Measure the camshaft bearing on the engine block [C].
The specifications are 1.2992–1.3002’’ (33,00–33,025
mm). The allowable wear limit is 0.002–0.0036’’
(0,05–0,09 mm).
B–3620
Measure the camshaft journals [D]. The specifications

are 1.2966–1.2972’’ (32,934–32,950 mm). The allowable D
wear limit is 0.002–0.0036’’ (0,05–0,09 mm).
If the measurements are not within the specifications,
replace the needed parts.
Put the camshaft on v–blocks.
Put a dial gauge on the journal.
A–2761
553 Loader
Servicing the Timing Gear and the Camshaft (Cont’d)
A
Turn the camshaft at a a slow rate [A]. The allowable wear
limit is 0.0031’’ (0,08 mm).
If the camshaft measurements are more than the
specifications, replace the needed parts.
A–2760
Measure the highest point on each lobe [B]. B

The specifications are 1.058’’ (26,88 mm). The allowable
wear limit is 1.0563’’ (26,83 mm).
NOTE: After the crankshaft is installed, check the
clearance for the camshaft gear.
B–5001
Install a dial gauge [C].

C
Hold one gear while turning the other gear.
mm). The allowable wear limit is 0.0079’’ (0,2 mm).
B–3672
553 Loader
OIL PUMP
A
Remove the oil pan [A].
B–5924
Remove the oil tube and screen [B]. Be careful do not

damage the O–ring.
B
Remove the connecting rod bolts.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the oil pump.
B–5920
Servicing the Oil Pump

C
Use a feeler gauge to check the clearance between the
inner and outer rotor [C].
The clearance for the inner rotor is 0.0039–0.0063’’
(0,099–0,0160 mm). The allowable wear limit is 0.0079’’
(0,2 mm).
B–3616
Use a feeler gauge to check the clearance between the

outer rotor and the body of the oil pump [D]. D
The clearance for the outer rotor is 0.0043–0.0075’’
(0,11–0,19 mm).
At rated engine RPM, the oil pump pressure is 28 to 64
PSI (196 to 441 kPa). It must not be any lower than 10 PSI
(69 kPa) at engine idle RPM.
A–2732
553 Loader
WATER PUMP
A
Remove the coolant.
Remove the water pump [A].
Remove the sheave and the snap ring.
Use an hydraulic press to remove the hub shaft and
bearing assembly from the impeller end.
Remove the oil seal from the pump body.
B–5926
Use a press to install a new seal (Item 1) [B] into the body.
Do not damage the seal. B
If the bearings are defective, replace the entire bearing
and shaft assembly.
Use a press to install the bearing and shaft into the pump
body. Press until the bearing is even with the pump flange.
Do not press too far; the pump body (Item 3) [B] will
break.
(2)
Press the impeller (Item 4) [B] onto the shaft. Correct (1)
clearance between impeller vanes and pump body is (4)
.030’’ (0,76 mm). (1) Seal set (3)
(2) Bearing
(3) Water pump body
(4) Water pump impeller B–5929
553 Loader
PISTONS AND CRANKSHAFT
Piston and Camshaft Removal
A
Remove the oil pan and the oil pump. (See Page 7–47.)
Remove the cap and the bearing from the connecting rod
[A].
B–3688
Remove the piston from the engine block [B]. B

NOTE: Mark the pistons so they will be returned to
the same cylinder.
Straighten the washers on the flywheel bolts.

Remove the bolts from the flywheel.
Use a puller to remove the flywheel.
Straighten the washers on the bolts that hold the main
bearing in position.
B–3625
Remove the main bearing bolts from the engine block [C].
C
Straighten the washers on the bolts that hold the main
bearing cover in position.
B–3644
Remove the bolts [D].

D
Install two bolts in the cover and pull the cover out [D].
B–3648
553 Loader
PISTONS AND CRANKSHAFT (Cont’d)
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–EngineServiceSectionPart2of3
A
Piston and Camshaft Removal (Cont’d)
Remove the crankshaft from the rear of the engine [A].
Do not damage the crankshaft.
Straighten the washers on the bolts on the main bearings.
B–4126
Remove the bolts [B].

Remove the bearing halves of the main bearings.
B
B–4092
Piston Installation
NOTE: The marks on the piston and connecting rod

C
must be in the same direction.
Install the rings on the piston [C]. Position the top ring so
gap is not lined up with piston pin. Position the other rings
so there is a gap every 90°.
Install the pistons in the engine block using a ring
compressor.
NOTE: The alignment marks must be opposite the

camshaft.
B–3614
Align the bearing cap to the connecting rod [D].

Put oil on the bolts and tighten to 19–22 ft.–lbs. (27–30
D
Nm) torque.
Install the oil pump tube and screen.
Put a new gasket on the oil pan and install the oil pan.
A–2761
553 Loader
Servicing the Pistons and Connecting Rods
A
Remove the piston rings.
Remove the piston pin [A].
NOTE: Mark the piston and the connecting rod so
they are assembled correctly.
B–3621
Measure the piston pin hole with an inside micrometer

[B]. B
mm). The allowable wear limit is 0.7886’’ (20,03mm).
A–2733
Measure the piston pin with a micrometer [C] and

connecting rod bushing. C
The new engine specifications are 0.0006–0.0015’’
(0,014–0,038 mm). Service replacement parts
specifications are 0.0006–0.0026’’ (0,015–0,066 mm).
The allowable wear limit is 0.0059’’ (0,15 mm).
Put the piston ring in the engine block cylinder. Use a
piston to push the ring to the bottom of the cylinder bore.
B–3633
Measure the clearance with a feeler gauge [D].

The specifications are as listed below:
D
Top Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0079–.0138 (0,20–0,35 mm)
Second Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00118–0.0177’’
(0,30–0,45 mm)
Oil Ring . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0098–0.0157’’ (0,25–0,040 mm)
The allowable wear limit for all the rings is 0.0492’’ (1,25
mm).
B–3622
553 Loader
A
Servicing the Pistons and Connecting Rods (Cont’d)
Install the connecting rod on the tool and check for correct
alignment [A].
NOTE: Check the I.D. of the connecting rod bushing,

because it is used for this check, make sure
it is not worn.

wear limit is 0.0020’’ (0,05 mm).
B–4067
553 Loader
A
Crankshaft Installation
Install the main bearings on the crankshaft journals.
Tighten the bolts to 15–17 ft.–lbs. (29–34 Nm) torque.
Install the thrust bearing with the oil grooves to the
outside.
Install the crankshaft in the engine. Align the holes in the
main bearings with the holes in the engine block.
Main
NOTE: The marks on the bearing housing must face Bearing
toward the flywheel [A]. Case Case
Bolt
A–2736
Install the main bearing case bolts and tighten to 22–25
ft.–lbs. (64–69 Nm) torque [A].
Install new seals on the crankshaft rear cover. B
Install the rear cover and tighten the bolts to 7–8 ft.–lbs.
(9,5–11 Nm) torque.
Servicing the Crankshaft

Put the crankshaft on v–blocks [B].
Put a dial gauge on the center journal. Turn the crankshaft
at a slow rate.
wear limit is 0.0031’’ (0,08 mm).
A–2763
Measure the No. 1 main bearing [C]. The specifications

are 1.7317–1.7339’’ (43,984–44,040 mm). C
B–3631
Measure the No. 1 main bearing journal [D]. The

The clearance between the bearing and the journal must
D
be 0.0013–0.0042’’ (0,034–0,106 mm) and the allowable
wear limit is 0.0079’’ (0,2 mm). Replace as needed.
B–3618
553 Loader
A
Servicing the Crankshaft (Cont’d)
Put a piece of plastic gauge on the crankshaft main
bearing [A].
Install the main bearing on the journal and tighten the
bolts to 21–25 ft.–lbs. (29–34 Nm) torque.
NOTE: DO NOT turn the bearing.

Remove the main bearing and measure the plastic gauge
[A].
Remove the bearing, measure the plastic gauge with the B–4065
paper gauge and if the measurement is over the allowable
limit, replace as needed.
The specifications for the outside diameter of the B
crankshaft journal is 1.7297–1.7303’’ (43,934–43,950
mm). The inside diameter of the bearing is
1.7317–1.7339’’ (43,984–44,026 mm). The allowable
wear limit between the two items is 0.0079’’ (0,20 mm).
Measure the connecting rod bearings [B]. The 120°

A–2727
Measure the connecting rod journal [C]. The

specifications are 1.4551–1.4557’’ (36,959–36,975 mm). C
The allowable wear limit between the two items is 0.0079’’
(0,2 mm).
A–2716
If the journals are not to specifications, grind the

crankshaft [D]. See Section 9 for the correct D A
specifications.
B
A A–2716
553 Loader
Servicing the Crankshaft (Cont’d)
A
When the crankshaft is installed, the end play must be
checked [A]. If the end play is more than 0.0059–0.0122’’
(0,15–0,31 mm) replace the thrust bearing on the main
bearing.
NOTE: If crankshaft is to be replaced, install plugs in

correct holes before installing crankshaft in
cylinder block.
B–10072
Servicing the Cylinder Liners

B
Use a micrometer to measure the inside of the cylinder
liners [B].
B–10073
To find the maximum wear, measure the inside diameter

of the cylinder liner in three different locations [C]. The C
inside diameter specifications on the cylinder liner is
2.9528–2.9535’’ (75,00–75,019 mm). The allowable wear
limit is +0.0059’’ (+0,15 mm). A
When the cylinder has more wear than the specifications, B
bore and hone the cylinder to an oversize diameter. (See
Specifications Section 8–1.)
NOTE: Make sure you use the correct oversize

pistons and rings.
When the cylinder wear is more than the wear limit, 1

replace the cylinder liner. These are dry liners.
Remove the cylinder liners.
Clean and put oil in the bore of the engine block.
Clean and put oil on the outside of the cylinder liner.
2
Install the cylinder liner into the engine block with the
chamfered end down.
After installation of the cylinder liner, bore or hone the
cylinder to standard size. (See Specifications Section
8–1.)
3
A–2717
553 Loader
BICS™ SYSTEM
Page
Number
BOBCAT INTERLOCK CONTROL SYSTEM (BICS™)

Inspecting the BICS™ System Controller (Engine STOPPED–Key ON) 8–3
Inspecting the Seat and Seat Bar Sensors (Engine RUNNING) . . . . . . 8–3
Inspecting the Traction Lock (Engine RUNNING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Inspecting the Lift Arm Bypass Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Troubleshooting Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
BICS™ SYSTEM CONTROLLER
Controller Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
LIFT LOCK BYPASS VALVE
SEAT BAR SENSOR
Seat Bar Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
SEAT SENSOR
Seat Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
TILT LOCK VALVE
TRACTION LOCK
BICS™
SYSTEM
553 Loader
Inspecting the BICS System Controller (Engine
A
STOPPED – Key ON) 1
1. Sit in the operator’s seat. Turn key ON, lower the 2
seat bar and disengage the parking brake. All five 3
(5) BICS Controller lights should be ON (Items 1, 2,
3, 4 & 5) [A]. 4
2. Engage the parking brake, raise the seat bar fully. 5
Seat bar light (Item 2) [A], valve light (Item 3) [A]
and traction light (Item 4) [A] should be OFF.
3. Raise up slightly off the seat. Seat light (Item 1) [A]
should be OFF.
P–3760
NOTE: Record what lights are blinking (if any) and
number of blinks. Refer to BICS
Troubleshooting Chart, Page 8–4. Clean area behind
4. Exit the loader and press traction lock override
B and under seat.
button. Traction light (Item 4) [A] should be ON.
Press override button again and traction light (Item
4) [A] should be OFF.
Inspecting the Seat and Seat Bar Sensors (Engine
RUNNING)
5. Sit in the operator’s seat, lower the seat bar and
engage the parking brake. Fasten the seat belt.
6. Start the engine and operate at low idle. While

raising the lift arms, raise the seat bar fully. The lift
arms should stop. Repeat using the tilt function.
NOTE: The auxiliary hydraulic functions are not P–4003
affected by the Bobcat Interlock Control
System (BICS).
Inspecting the Traction Lock (Engine RUNNING) C
7. Fasten the seat belt, disengage the parking brake, Operator
and raise the seat bar fully. Move the steering levers Seat
slowly forward and backward. The traction lock
should be engaged. Lower the seat bar.
8. Engage the parking brake pedal and move the

steering levers slowly forward and backward. The Seat
1 Spring
traction lock should be engaged. Seat
Inspecting the Lift Arm By–Pass Control Sensor
9. Raise the lift arms six (6) feet (2 m) off the ground.
Stop the engine, pull and hold the by–pass control
knob. Push the toe of the left foot pedal or move the
left hand control in toward the operator (hand MC–2043
controls) and the lift arms should lower slowly.
Maintenance
Clean any debris, dirt or objects from under or behind the
operator seat [B] & [C]. The rear of the seat must move
up and down.
Clearance is necessary under the seat spring (Item 1) [C]
and the seat, to allow the seat to move up and down freely. AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
With adequate clearance, the seat sensor will be allowed The Bobcat Interlock Control System (BICS)
to function properly. must deactivate the lift, tilt and traction drive
functions. If it does not, contact your dealer for
Inspect seat bar pivot area for tightness of linkage bolts. service. DO NOT modify the system.
W–2151–0394
Replace parts that are damaged. Use only genuine
Melroe replacement parts.
553 Loader
Troubleshooting Chart
The following list shows the effects which can happen to the loader, and the probable causes when the BICS Controller
lights are off or flashing. Have the service procedure performed ONLY BY QUALIFIED BOBCAT SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Flashing Indicator Means System Problem

Effect on Operation (See Your Bobcat Dealer for Service)
of Loader
Indicator When Light Is Number of
Light Light ON Light OFF OFF Flashes Cause
Seat Operator in Seat No Operator in Seat Lift and tilt functions 2 Seat sensor circuit shorted to battery.
will not operate.
3 Seat sensor circuit shorted to ground.
Seat Bar Seat Bar Down Seat Bar Up Lift, tilt and traction 2 Seat bar sensor circuit shorted to
functions will not battery.
operate. 3 Seat bar sensor circuit shorted to
ground.
Valve Control Valve Can Control Valve Lift and tilt functions 1 Valve output is open.
Be Used Cannot Be Used will not operate. 2 Valve output circuit shorted to battery.
3 Valve output circuit shorted to ground.
3 Valve output circuit is not grounded.
Traction Loader can be Loader cannot be Loader cannot be 1 Traction lock hold coil circuit is open.
moved forward & moved forward and moved forward and 2 Traction lock hold coil circuit shorted
backward. backward. backward. to battery.
3 Traction lock hold coil circuit shorted
to ground.
4 Traction lock pull coil circuit is open.
5 Traction lock pull coil circuit is shorted
to battery.
6 Traction lock pull coil circuit is shorted
to ground.
Power BICS Controller BICS Controller is Lift, tilt and traction
is operating not operating functions will not
correctly. correctly. operate.
NOTES:
(1) If the seat and/or seat bar sensor circuits are open, the corresponding lights will be OFF. If one of the lights
stay OFF, check the circuit for continuity. See Inspection & Maintenance Instructions in Preventive
Maintenance section.
(2) If all five lights flash repeatedly, the voltage supply is greater than 16 volts or less than 9 volts.
(3) Flashing patterns will repeat every 3.25 seconds.
(4) If seat indicator light does not go ON, check for debris, dirt or objects under or behind the seat.
NOTE: If the Seat Bar is lowered before the seat sensor is activated, a 10 second delay will occur before the valve
and traction lights come on. (only loaders with BICS controller S/N’s above 200,000 will have this delay.)
553 Loader
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The following troubleshooting guide is provided for
assistance in locating and correcting BICS system
problems. It is recommended that these procedures be
done by authorized Bobcat Service Personnel only.
Check for correct function after adjustments,
repairs or service. Failure to make correct
death.
W–2004–1285
BICS CONTROLLER
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Power indicator light does not come ON. 1, 2, 3, 6

All indicator lights flashing. 4
One of the indicator lights flashing. 5
Intermittent indicator lights. 6, 7, 8, 9
SOLUTION SUGGESTIONS
1. Check that ignition switch ON.

2. Check BICS 10 amp. fuse.
3. Check wiring and connections. Make sure the connector is securely connected
to the controller. Remove controller and pull on connector to check.
4. Look at indicator light windows, if they are milky white in appearance it is most
likely caused by moisture in the controller. Allow to dry or replace the controller.
5. Refer to BICS system controller troubleshooting chart .(See Page 8–4.)
6. Check wire connections to make sure connectors are locked into place.
7. Check pins in connectors for pins pushed back or bent.
8. Move the system wiring back and forth to help locate the area that may be causing
the intermittent connection.
9. Use sensor tester MEL1428 to isolate problem between sensor and controller
and wiring.
553 Loader
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Cont’d)
death.
W–2004–1285
TRACTION LOCK
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Traction lock stays engaged. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Intermittent activation of traction lock. 9, 10, 11
1. Check that controller power indicator light is ON.

2. Make sure brake pedal is not engaged.
3. Maneuver loader to allow brake discs to move and remove pressure on the brake
wedge so it can retract.
4. If all lights indicate the brake should be released, but it doesn’t, check the brake
25 amp. fuse.
5. When checking fuse, also check other fuses. Check the fuse block for correct
orientation and location of fuses. (See Electrical System, Page 6–1.)
6. To test the solenoid, the pull coil should be .4 to .5 ohms and the hold coil 10.5 to
11.0 ohms.
7. Check brake solenoid and cover mounting hardware for the correct torque.
8. Remove brake cover and check wedges for binding in the wedge guides.
9. Check wire connections for loose connector body.
10. Check for loose or bent pins in connectors.

11. Check for loose spade connectors in fuse holder.
553 Loader
death.
W–2004–1285
SEAT SENSOR
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Seat indicator light does not come ON with operator in seat.. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
Seat indicator light stays ON when operator out of seat. 2, 3, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
Intermittent indicator light during operation. 11, 15, 16, 17, 18
1. Check to make sure power indicator light is ON.

2. Check for debris under and around seat.
3. Look for any obstruction around seat.
4. Check to make sure seat rail lowers when weight is in seat.
5. Raise cab and check for magnet collar movement when weight is added to seat.
(Magnet collar should extend approximately 3/8’’ beyond the sensor assembly
with weight in the seat).
6. Use sensor tester to check operation of sensor and controller. Follow instructions
on tester.
7. Check to make sure the magnet guide pin is in place.
8. Check for contamination on magnets such as metal particles or for shipping plate
over magnets.
9. Check to make sure both magnets are in collar.
10. Check for binding of magnet collar or bushing with hex head on other side for
binding.
11. Check for correct mounting. One spring for standard seat. Two springs for
suspension seats. Thick washers should be under front seat mounting rails on
both sides.
12. Check for loose hardware mounting magnet collar. Check to make sure the
magnet collar bushing is threaded on all the way so it is contacting seat rail.
13. Check to make sure seat rail raises when weight is removed from the seat.
14. Raise cab and check for magnet collar movement when weight is removed from
seat. (Magnet collar should extend approximately 1/8’’ beyond the sensor
assembly without weight in seat).
15. With smaller operators that operate with the seat forward some mounting
alterations may be required. (See solution suggestions 16, 17 and 18.)
16. Adjust suspension seat to lightest weight setting.
17. Check to make sure the seat rails move up and down freely when weight is added.
18. Add a washer between the magnetic collar bushing and the seat rail. This will
reduce the amount of seat travel required to activate the system. Must check, with
seat moved all the way back, that indicator light does not stay on with operator
out of seat. If light does not go out with operator out of the seat, the washer must
be removed.
553 Loader
death.
W–2004–1285
SEAT BAR SENSOR
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Indicator light does not come ON when seat bar is lowered. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
1. Check controller power indicator light. It must be ON.

2. Check sensor wire connection.
3. Use the BICS sensor tester MEL1428 to check sensor and controller.
4. Check for loose hardware.

5. Check keyed bushing to make sure magnet collar rotates with seat bar.
6. Check magnet collar magnets for contamination such as metal particles.
553 Loader
death.
W–2004–1285
PROBLEM SOLUTION #
Bypass valve stuck. 1

Bypass valve stem bent or broke. 2
1. Rotate shaft.
2. Replace manual spool cartridge.
553 Loader
BICS™ SYSTEM CONTROLLER
A 2
Raise the loader operator cab. (Page 1–1.)
1
The controller mounting bolts are located on the back of
the operator cab [A].
Remove the top mounting bolt (Item 1) [A] from the
controller.
Loosen the (2) lower mounting bolts (Item 2) [A].
Lower the operator cab.
P–5865
NOTE: The operator seat is removed in photo [B] for

clarity purpose only. The seat does not need B
to be removed to remove the controller.
1
Slide the controller (Item 1) [B] up and remove it from the
back of the operator cab.
Disconnect the electrical harness from the controller and
remove the controller from the loader.
P–5917
NOTE: Install the harness connector (Item 1) [C] into

the controller (Item 2) [C] before installing the
controller.
C
Be sure the connector to the BICS system

controller are correctly engaged in the
controller when installing the controller. An 1
audible snap can be heard when the
connector is correctly installed. Try to pull the
connector out of the controller, if it cannot be P–4707
removed it has been correctly installed [C].
I–2087–1095
Installation: Tighten the controller mounting bolts to

80–90 in.–lbs. (9–10 Nm) torque.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the controller.
553 Loader
BICS™ SYSTEM CONTROLLER (Cont’d)
Controller Test
A
MEL1428 Sensor Tester is necessary for the following
procedure:
Turn the key to the ON position. DO NOT START THE
ENGINE. 1
After completing the procedure for the Seat sensor test
or the Seat Bar sensor test, do the Controller test. Refer
to Page 8–13 or 8–15 for correct procedures to do the
Seat Bar sensor test or the Seat sensor test. 2
Move the toggle switch (Item 1) [A] on the sensor tester

(Item 2) [A] to the Present position. P–4703
If the controller is working correctly, the Seat light (Item

1) [B] on the controller will illuminate when the tester is
B
connected to the Seat sensor.
P–4706
When the tester is connected to Seat Bar sensor, the Seat

Bar light (Item 1) [C] will illuminate if the controller is C
working correctly.
P–4704
Move the toggle switch (Item 1) [D] on the sensor tester D

(Item 2) [D] to the Absent position.
The Seat light (Item 1) [B] or the Seat Bar light (Item 1)
[C] should go off.
If the tests above fail, there is a problem with the BICS
system controller or the wiring harness. 1
Refer to Page 8–3 for the correct procedure to inspect the
BICS System Controller.
2
P–4699
553 Loader
SEAT BAR SENSOR
A
1
P–4702
Remove the mounting bolt (Item 1) [B] from the pivot

bushing. B
Remove the sensor mounting bolt (Item 2) [B] and nut. 1
2
Be careful to not overtighten the sensor
mounting bolt and nut to prevent breakage of P–3246
the sensor.
I–2088–1095
Installation: Be sure the tabs on the pivot bushing are

C
positioned in the slotted hole (Item 1) [C] of the operator
cab as shown.
Pull the seat bar back and remove the assembly as
follows:
NOTE: The sensor assembly [D] is shown removed 1
from the operator cab for clarity purpose
only. The sensor assembly can be removed
without removing the seat bar from the
operator cab.
Remove the pivot bushing mounting bolt (Item 1) [D] and
washer (Item 2) [D] from the pivot bushing (Item 3) [D]. P–3247
Installation: Tighten the pivot bushing mounting bolt to

180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque.
D
Remove the pivot bushing (Item 3) [D], sensor (Item 4)
[D], magnet (Item 5) [D] and plastic bushing (Item 6) [D] 3 6 2
from the seat bar. 1
Inspect all parts for damage and wear and replace if

necessary.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the seat bar
sensor.
Refer to Page 5–1 for seat bar removal and installation Left Side
procedure. 4 5 of Seat Bar
P–3284
553 Loader
SEAT BAR SENSOR (Cont’d)
Seat Bar Sensor Test
A
Use MEL1428 Sensor Tester for the following procedure:
1
ENGINE.
P–4702
Connect MEL1428 Sensor Tester (Item 1) [B] inline as

shown to the seat bar sensor connectors. Also see inset
B
[B].
P–4701
P–4700
The power light (Item 1) [C] on the sensor tester will

illuminate. C
P–4698
Lower the seat bar. The sensor test light (Item 1) [D]
should illuminate. D
Raise the seat bar. The sensor test light (Item 1) [D]
should go off.
1
If the above tests fails, there is a problem with the seat bar
sensor.
Seat Bar Sensor.
Refer to Page 5–1 for seat bar removal and installation
procedure.
P–4699
553 Loader
SEAT SENSOR
A
Locate the seat sensor (Item 1) [A] beneath the operator
cab.
P–5863
Remove the sensor connector (Item 1) [B] from the

holder. B
Disconnect the sensor connector (Item 1) [B].
Remove the magnet collar mounting bolt (Item 2) [B], 3
washer (Item 1) [C] and magnet (Item 2) [C] from the
sensor (Item 3) [B]. 2
4
1
DO NOT overtighten the magnet mounting P–3988

bolt to prevent damage to the magnet.
I–2089–1095
Remove the sensor mounting bolt (Item 4) [B] and nut.

C
5
3
2
1
Be careful to not overtighten the sensor
mounting bolt and nut to prevent breakage of 4
the sensor.
I–2088–1095
Remove the sensor (Item 3) [C]. P–4041
NOTE: Be sure not to lose the magnet collar

alignment pin (Item 4) [C] which is located in
the sensor (Item 3) [C] when removing the D
sensor.
Remove the threaded bushing (Item 5) [C] from the seat
track mounting bolt (Item 1) [D].
1
Inspect all parts for damage and wear and replace if
necessary.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the seat sensor.
Refer to Page 5–1 for seat removal and installation
procedure.
P–4044
553 Loader
SEAT SENSOR (Cont’d)
A
Seat Sensor Test
Use MEL1428 Sensor Tester for the following procedure: 2
ENGINE.
Disconnect the seat sensor connector (Item 1 – Inset)
[A].
Connect MEL1428 Sensor Tester (Item 2) [A] inline as
shown to the seat sensor.
P–3988 P–4705
The power light (Item 1) [B] on the sensor tester will

illuminate.
B
P–4698
Sit on the operator seat. The sensor test light (Item 1) [C]
should illuminate. C
Get off the operator seat. The sensor test light (Item 1) [C]
should go off.
1
If the above tests fail, there is a problem with the seat
sensor.
Seat Sensor.
Refer to Page 5–1 for seat removal and installation
procedure.
P–4699
553 Loader
TRACTION LOCK
Removal And Installation
A
2
P–04712

Do not modify the electrical wiring connected
to the traction lock solenoid or any part of the 1
traction lock system. The traction lock
provides the locking function of the parking
brake. Service work on the traction lock system P–05988
should only be performed by a qualified
technician. Use only genuine Melroe parts if
repair is necessary.
W–2165–0195 B
Raise the loader operator cab. (See Page 1–1.) 1
NOTE: The loader control panel is removed for
clarity purpose only. The traction lock can be
removed without removing the control panel.
Remove the Do Not Modify sta–strap (P/N 6665527) from
the electric solenoid connector (Item 1) [A]. 3
Installation: Install a new Do Not Modify sta–strap (P/N
6665527) on the electric solenoid connector. 2
P–07024
Remove the two mounting bolts (Item 2) [A] from the
electric solenoid mounting bracket.
Installation: Tighten the mounting bolts to 25–28 ft.–lbs. C
(34–38 Nm) torque. Be sure the solenoid mounting
bracket is installed in the same position. The solenoid
mounting surface has a slight angle which tips the top of
the solenoid toward the rear of the loader when installed
correctly. (See inset photo [A].) 2
Remove the electric solenoid/mounting bracket
assembly (Item 1) [B] from the chaincase cover.
Remove and inspect the compression spring (Item 2) [B] 3
for wear or damage. Replace if necessary. The spring
may also stay with the shaft when the electric solenoid
and bracket are removed from the chaincase. 1
Installation: Install the compression spring (Item 2) [B] P–07025
on the collar located on the electric solenoid.
Remove the traction lock assembly (Item 3) [B] from the
chaincase.
Remove the shaft mounting bolt (Item 1) [C], washer and
spring from the assembly shaft (Item 2) [C]. Remove the
wedge (Item 3) [C] and inspect all parts for damage or
wear. Replace if necessary.
Failure to use LOCTITE may allow the traction
Installation: Thoroughly clean and dry the shaft lock assembly to loosen up which can cause
mounting bolt (Item 1) [C], the shaft (Item 2) [C] and damage to the traction lock system.
wedge (Item 3) [C]. Use LOCTITE #242 when I–2090–1095
assembling these parts to the traction lock assembly.
Refer to Page 8–3 for the traction lock inspection
procedure.
553 Loader
A

attachment to fall and cause injury or death.
W–2059–0991
P–4034
1
the system.
I–2003–0284
2
Raise the loader lift arms and install an approved lift arm P–5929
Install jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.
C
Drain the hydraulic fluid reservoir. (See Page 2–1.)
The lift lock bypass valve (Item 1) [A] is located under the
right side of the control panel. 1
Remove the engine speed control. (See Page 7–1.) This
procedure is optional.
Remove the control panel. (See Page 3–1.) This
procedure is optional.
If you choose not to remove the engine speed control and P–5941
control panel, the lift arm bypass control knob (Item 1) [B]
will need to be removed from the control panel.
Hold the bypass control knob (Item 1) [B] and loosen the
jam nut on the bypass valve shaft.
Remove the bypass control knob and jam nut from the
valve shaft.
Remove the rubber washer (Item 2) [B].
Disconnect the four (4) tubelines from the lift lock bypass
valve (Item 1) [C].
553 Loader
LIFT LOCK BYPASS VALVE (Cont’d)
A
2
Remove the (2) mounting bolts and nuts (Item 1) [A] from 1
the lift lock bypass valve.
1
Installation: Tighten the (2) mounting bolts and nuts to
180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque.
Remove and replace the bypass valve mounting bracket
(Item 2) [A] if necessary.
Installation: Tighten the valve bracket mounting bolts to
190–240 in.–lbs. (22–27 Nm) torque.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the lift lock P–5944
bypass valve in the loader.
Refer to Page 8–3 for lift arm bypass control inspection
procedure.
B

which can result in injury or death. 2
W–2103–1285
P–4096

Remove the bypass valve (Item 1) [B] from the valve
block. Inspect the bypass valve for damage and replace
if necessary.
Remove the check valve (Item 2) [B] from the valve block.
Inspect the check valve for damage and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the hydraulic fittings on the valve block for
damage and replace if necessary.
553 Loader
TILT LOCK VALVE
A

attachment to fall and cause injury or death. 1
W–2059–0991
P–7052
B
1
the system.
I–2003–0284
Place jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.

2 P–7053
Drain the hydraulic fluid reservoir. (See Page 2–1.)
The tilt lock valve (Item 1) [A] is located on the right side
of the loader frame.
Disconnect the five (5) tubelines connected to the tilt lock Do not modify the electrical wiring connected
valve [A]. to the tilt lock valve solenoid. Service work for
the tilt lock valve should be performed by a
Remove the Do Not Modify sta–strap (P/N 6665527) from qualified technician. Use only genuine Melroe
the electric solenoid connector (Item 1) [B]. parts if repair to the BICS™is necessary.
W–2166–0195
Installation: Install a new Do Not Modify sta–strap (P/N
6665527) on the electric solenoid connector (Item 1) [B].
Disconnect the solenoid connector (Item 1) [B].
Remove the two (2) mounting bolts (Item 2) [B] and nuts
from the tilt lock valve.
Installation: Tighten the two (2) mounting bolts to
180–200 in.–lbs. (21–23 Nm) torque.
Remove the tilt lock valve.
Reverse the removal procedure to install the tilt lock
valve.
553 Loader
TILT LOCK VALVE (Cont’d)
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–BICSSystemSection
A
Remove the solenoid mounting nut (Item 1) [A], solenoid
(Item 2) [A] and solenoid valve (Item 3) [A] from the tilt
lock valve.
3 1
P–4115
Remove the check valve (Item 1) [B] from the lift lock
valve. B
Assembly: Tighten the solenoid mounting nut to 80–90
Inspect the solenoid valve, check valve and hydraulic
fittings for damage or wear. Replace if necessary.
Refer to Page 8–3 for lift arm bypass control inspection
procedure.
1
P–4114
553 Loader
SPECIFICATIONS
Page
Number
DECIMAL & MILLIMETER EQUIVALENTS
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–12
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Grinding Specifications for the Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Fuel Injector Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Fuel Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Piston Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Rocker Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
Valve Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–9
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
Loader Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
Operation & Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
METRIC TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–10
U.S. TO METRIC CONVERSION
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–12
STANDARD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–11
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR LOADER SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8
553 Loader
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS • Dimensions are given for loader equipped with standard tires and dirt bucket.
Dimensions may vary with other types. All dimensions are shown in inches. Respective
metric dimensions are given in millimeters enclosed by parentheses.
LOADER DIMENSIONS • Where applicable, specifications conform to SAE / ISO standards and are subject to
change without notice.
49.5
(1257)
127.5
97°
(3239)
62.5
(1588)
102.5
36° (2604)
18 42
(457) (1067)
85
(2159)
72.75 53.6
(1842) 32 (1362)
(813)
27° 24°
30 38
7.2 31 6.5 (965)
(762)
(183) (787) (165)
47.2
*84.6 (1199)
(2149)
106.6
(2708)
B–12767
This loader was designed without counterweights or ballasts. Changes of structure or weight distribution of the
loader can cause changes in control and steering response and can cause failure of the loader parts.
OPERATIONS & PERFORMANCE 553
Weights
Operating Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3622 lbs. (1644 kg
Rated Operating Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 lbs. (386 kg)
Tipping Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700 lbs. (772 kg)
Travel Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infinitely variable 0–6.0 MPH (10 km/hr.)
Controls
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direction & speed controlled by two hand levers.
Loader Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lift, tilt function controlled by separate hand controls.
Front Auxiliary Function: Controlled by the right steering lever
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand lever throttle; pull cable shutdown; key–type starter switch
Main Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrostatic
Service Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two independent hydrostatic drive systems controlled by two hand operated
steering levers.
Secondary Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One of the hydrostatic transmissions.
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring activated mechanical traction lock applied when seat bar is up,
key is turned off or when foot pedal is engaged.
ENGINE
Make . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kubota
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D950–B
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5 HP (16 kW)
Maximum Governed RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000 RPM
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.5 ft.–lbs. (57,6 Nm) @ 1800 RPM
Number of Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three
Bore/Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95/2.76(74,9/70,1)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.6 cu. in. (928 cm.)
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure System W/Filter
Crankcase Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry replaceable paper cartridge, with safety element
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diesel–Compression
Low Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3150–3250 RPM
High Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150 RPM
553 Loader
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d) 553
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine driven gear type
Pump Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 GPM (30,3 L/min.) @ 3000
System Relief @ Quick Couplers . . . . . . 1600–1650 PSI (11030–11375 kPa)
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full flow, replaceable 10 micron paper in return line
Hydraulic Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doubleacting
Bore Diameter:
Lift Cylinder (2) .................... 2.00 (50,8)
Tilt Cylinder (1) .................... 3.00 (76,2)
Rod Diameter:
Lift Cylinder (2) .................... 1.25 (31,8)
Tilt Cylinder (1) .................... 1.50 (38,1)
Stroke:
Lift Cylinder (2) .................... 22.2 (564)
Tilt Cylinder (1) .................... 12.4 (315)
Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–spool, open center, series type, W/float detent on lift and detent on auxiliary
Fluid Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAE standard tubes, hoses & fittings
Hydraulic Function Time:

Raise Lift Arms to Maximum Height . . . . 4.1 Seconds
Lower Lift Arms from Maximum Height . 3.5 Seconds
Move Bucket to Dump Position . . . . . . . . 2.5 Seconds
Move Bucket to Retracted Position . . . . 1.9 Seconds
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bobcat Fluid (P/N 6563328) If fluid is not available, use
10W–30 or 10W–40 Class SE Motor Oil for temperatures above 0°F. (18°C)
& 5W–30 for temperatures below 0°F (–18°C).
ELECTRICAL
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belt drive, 55 amps. Open
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt, 425 cold crank amps. @ 0°F (–18°C) 75 min. reserve capacity
Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt
DRIVE SYSTEM
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tandem hydro. pumps infinitely variable, driving 2 fully reversing hydrostatic motors
Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #60 HS roller chain & sprockets in sealed chaincase with oil lubrication
Total Engine to Wheel Reduction . . . . . . 38:14:1
CAPACITIES
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 qts. (8,5 L)
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 gals. (38 L)
Engine Oil W/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 qts. (3,8 L)
Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 gals. (8,7 L)
Hydraulic/Hydrostatic System . . . . . . . . . 4.8 gals. (18 L)
Chaincase Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 gals. (15 L)
TIRES
Recommended Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inflate tires to the MAXIMUM pressure shown on the side wall of the tire.
DO NOT mix brands of tires used on the same loader.
VIBRATION DATA
Hand Arm Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Less Than 2,5 m/sec2 RMS (tested per ISO 5349)
Whole Body Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Less Than 0,5 m/sec2 RMS (tested per ISO 7096)
553 Loader
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
All dimensions are given in inches. Respective metric dimensions are given in millimeters enclosed by parentheses.
Engine Compression @ 200 to 300 RPM (Operating Temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 PSI (3103 kPa)
Fuel Injection Nozzles
Opening Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1990–2133 PSI (13721–14707 kPa)

Fuel Tightness Nozzle Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Nozzle at 1848 PSI (12742 kPa)
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Tightness Plunger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 sec: initial pressure drop 5689–4978 PSI (39226–34323 kPa)
Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 sec: initial pressure drop 5689–4978 PSI (39226–34323 kPa)
Fuel Tightness of Delivery Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 sec: initial pressure drop from 3129–2987 PSI (21575–20595 kPa)
Limited Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 sec: initial pressure drop from 3129–2987 PSI (21575–20595 kPa)
Injection Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5–24.5 degrees B.T.D.C.
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Distortion Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0020’’ (0,05 mm) in 4’’ (100 mm)

of the length of the cylinder head surface.
Thickness of Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0413–0.0453’’ (1,05–1,15 mm)
Thickness of Gasket Shim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0079’’ (0,2 mm)
Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0236–0.0315’’ (0,6–0,8 mm)
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412–469 PSI (2840–3234 kPa)
Head Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–51 ft.–lbs. (65–69 Nm)
Valves
Valve Seat Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.083’’ (2,1 mm)

Valve Seat Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 degrees
O.D. of the Valve Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2740–0.2746’’ (6,960–6,975 mm)
I.D. of the Valve Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2759–0.2765’’ (7,010–7,025 mm)
Clearance Between Valve Stem & Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0014–0.0026’’ (0,035–0,065 mm)
Limited Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.004’’ (0,1 mm)
Depth of Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.035–0.043’’ (0,9–1,1 mm)
Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.51’’ (1,3 mm)
Valve Clearance (Cold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0057–0.0073’’ (0,145–0,185 mm)
Valve Springs
Free Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.382–1.402’’ (35,1–35,6 mm)

Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37’’ (34,8 mm)
Fitted Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2201’’ (30,99 mm)
Load to Compress to Fitted Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5 lbs. (7,49 kg)
Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 lbs. (6,36 kg)
Limit Permitted for Spring being Straight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.051’’ (1,3 mm)
Rocker Arms
O.D. of Rocker Arm Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4320–0.4324’’ (10,973–10,983 mm)

I.D. of Rocker Arm Bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4330–0.4346’’ (10,997–11,038 mm)
Clearance Between Rocker Arm Shaft & Bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0005–0.0026’’ (0,013–0,065 mm)
Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0047’’ (0,12 mm)
Adjustment of Compression Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0295–0.0443’’ (0,750–1,125 mm)
Camshaft
O.D. of Camshaft Bearing Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2966–1.2972’’ (32,934–32,950 mm)

I.D. of Camshaft Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2992–1.3002’’ (33,00–33,025 mm)
Clearance Between Camshaft Bearing & Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0020–0.0036’’ (0,050–0,091 mm)
Alignment of the Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0020’’ (0,05 mm)
Cam Lobe Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0583’’ (26,88 mm)
Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0563’’ (26,83 mm)
Gear Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0017–0.0045’’ (0,042–0,115 mm)
Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0079’’ (0,2 mm)
553 Loader
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
All dimensions are given in inches. Respective metric dimensions are given in millimeters enclosed by parentheses.
Cylinders
I.D. of Cylinder Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9528–2.9535’’ (75,00–75,019 mm)

Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +0.0059’’ (+0,015 mm)
I.D. of Oversized Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9724–2.9732’’ (75,5–75,519 mm)
Piston Rings
Ring Gap, Top Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0079–0.0138’’ (0,20–0,35 mm)

Ring Gap, 2nd Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0118–0.0177’’ (0,30–0,45 mm)
Ring Gap, Oil Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0078–0.0157’’ (0,20–0,40 mm)
Side Clearance of Ring in Groove
Top Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Can not measure accurately
2nd Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0033–0.0044’’ (0,084–0,112 mm)
Oil Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0008–0.0020’’ (0,020–0,052 mm)
Pistons
I.D. of Piston Bosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.784–0.7879’’ (20,00–20,013 mm)

Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7885’’ (20,03 mm)
O.D. of Piston Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7875–0.7878’’ (20,002–20,011 mm)
I.D. of Connecting Rod Bushing (Small End, Fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7884–0.7890’’ (20,025–20,040 mm)
Clearance Between Piston Pin & Bushing (New Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0006–0.0015’’ (0,014–0,038 mm)
Service Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0006–0.0026’’ (0,015–0,066 mm)
Connecting Rod Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.008’’ (0,02 mm)
Oversize Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020’’ (0,5 mm)
Crankshaft
Crankshaft Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0008’’ (0,02 mm)

O.D. of Crankshaft Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7297–1.7303’’ (43,934–43,950 mm)
I.D. of Crankshaft Bearing No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7317–1.7339’’ (43,984–44,040 mm)
I.D. of Crankshaft Bearing No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7317–1.7339’’ (43,984–44,041 mm)
Clearance Between Crankshaft Journals & Bearing No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0013–0.0042’’ (0,034–0,106 mm)
Clearance Between Crankshaft Journals & Bearing No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0013–0.0036’’ (0,034–0,092 mm)
O.D. of Connecting Rod Journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4551–1.4557’’ (36,959–36,975 mm)
I.D. of Connecting Rod Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4569–1.4587’’ (47,004–47,050 mm)
Clearance Between Connecting Rod Journals & Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0011–0.0036’’ (0,029–0,091 mm)
Crankshaft End Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0059–0.0122’’ (0,15–0,31 mm)
Oil Pump
Oil Pressure @ Rated RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–64 PSI (196–441 kPa)

Limit Permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 PSI (196 kPa)
Oil Presure @ Idle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PSI (69 kPa)
Rotor Lobe Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0043–0.0059’’ (0,11–0,15 mm)
Limit Premitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0079’’ (0,20 mm)
Clearance Between Outer Rotor & Pump Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0028–0.0059’’ (0,07–0,15 mm)
End Clearance Between Rotor & Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0031–0.0051’’ (0,08–0,13 mm)
Thermostat
Opening Temperature (Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176.9°–182.3°F (80.5°–83.5°C)

(Full Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203°F (95°C)
Distance of Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3150’’ (8 mm)
553 Loader
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (Cont’d)
Grinding Specifications for the Crankshaft
If the standard–size bearing cannot be used due to excessive wear of the crankpin and crank journals, use undersize or
oversize bearings.
D
3 C
1
2
A B
1 2
REF. SIZE CODE NUMBER DESCRIPTION DIMENSION MARK

0.008 in . 15261–2391–1 Crankshaft 1.7218–1.7224 in. 020US
0,2 mm Bearing #1 43,743–43,750 mm
A
0.016 in. 15261–2392–1 Crankshaft 1.7139–1.7146 in. 040US
0,4 mm Bearing #1 43,534–43,550 mm)
0,008 in. 15261–2393–1 Crankshaft 1.7218–1.7224 in. 020US
0,2 mm Bearing #2 43,734–43,750 mm
B
0.016 in. 15261–2394–1 Crankshaft 1.7139–1.7146 in. 040US
0,4 mm Bearing #2 43,534–43,550 mm
0,008 in. 15531–2297–1 Crankpin 1.4472–1.4478 in. 020US
0,2 mm Bearing 36,759–36,775 mm
C
0.016 in. 15531–2298–1 Crankpin 1.4393–1.4400 in. 040US
0,4 mm Bearing 36,559–36,575 mm
0,008 in. 15261–2397–1 Crank Side 0.9528–0.9547 in. 0.20 OS
0,2 mm 15261–2395–1 Bearing 24,20–24,25 mm
D
0.016 in. 15261–2398–1 Crank Side 0.9606 –0.9626 in. 0.40 OS
0,4 mm 15261–2396–1 Bearing 24,40–24,45 mm
0.1300–0.1457 in.
1 3,3–3,7 mm
0.1102–0.1260 in.
2 2,8–3,2 mm
Oil hole must be 0.0394–0.0591 in. (1–1,5 mm) chamfer.
Use on oil stone to chamfer the oil hole.
553 Loader
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR LOADER
Specifications
Item Ft.–Lbs. Nm
Air Cleaner Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25–28 34–38
Alternator Pulley Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 68
Axle Hub Mounting Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575–625 780–848
Axle Sprocket Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–245 298–332
Bob–Tach Pivot Pin Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135–140 183–190

Bob–Tach Lever Pivot Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25–28 34–38
Camshaft Retainer Plate Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–20 23–27
Centering Spring Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25–28 34–38
Chaincase to Main Frame Bolts & Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90–100 122–136
Connecting Rod Bolts:
Control Pedal Linkage Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20–22 27–30
Control Valve Mounting Bolts & Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–16 20–22
Crankshaft Pulley Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101–116 137–157
Cylinder Head Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48–51 65–70
Flywheel Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40–43 54–59
Front Panel Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16–20 22–27
Fuel Camshaft Retainer Plate Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6 6,8–8,1
Glow Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–18 20–24
Hydraulic Reservoir Strap Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16–20 22–27
Hydraulic Filter Housing Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 34
Hydrostatic Motor Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65–70 88–95
Hydrostatic Pump Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65–70 88–95
Idler Gear Shaft Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8 9–11
Injection Pump Mounting Bolts & Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17–20 23–27
Injection Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36–51 46–69
Injector Nozzle Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43–58 59–79
Main Bearing Case Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51–54 69–73
Main Bearing Case Half Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34–38 46–52
Main Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35–40 47–54
Operator Cab Fastening Nuts (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40–50 54–68
Operator Cab Pivot Bolts & Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25–35 34–47
Pedal Lock Linkage to Main Frame Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8 9,5–10,8
Pedal Lock Linkage Tab Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 34
Pintle Arm Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40–50 54–68
Pintle Arm Lobe Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25–28 34–38
Pintle Bar Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 38
Pivot Pins Lock Bolt & Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18–20 24–27
Rear Bearing Case Cover Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–15 18–20
Seat Belt Fastening Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40–45 54–61
Seat Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–11 12,2–15
Seat Bar Pivot Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25–28 34–38
Steering Linkage Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 31
Steering Linkage Lock Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 31
Timing Gearcase Cover Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–17 18–23
Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105–115 142–156
553 Loader
HYDRAULIC/HYDROSTATIC FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Use Melroe hydraulic/hydrostatic transmission fluid (P/N 6563328). If this fluid is not
available, use 10W–30 or 10W–40 SAE Motor Oil (5W–30 for 0°F [–18°C] and
Below).
DO NOT use automatic transmission fluids in the loader or permanent damage to the
transmission will result.
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under

pressure can penetrate skin or eyes
causing serious injury. Fluid leaks
under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to
find leaks. Do not use your bare
hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate
medical attention.
W–2074–1285
When temperatures below zero degree F (–18°C) are common, the loader must be
kept in a warm building. Extra warm–up time must be used each time the loader is
started during cold temperature conditions. Cold fluid will not flow easily and it makes
action of the hydraulic function slower. Loss of fluid flow to the hydrostatic
transmission pump (indicated by TRANS light ON) can cause transmission damage
in less than 60 seconds.
During cold weather 32°F (0°C) and

below, do not operate machine until
the engine has run for at least five (5)
minutes at less than half throttle.
This warm–up period is necessary
for foot pedal operation and safe
stopping. Do not operate controls
during warm–up period. When
temperatures are below –20°F
(30°C), the hydrostatic oil must be
heated or kept warm. The
hydrostatic system will not get
enough oil at low temperatures. Park
the machine in an area where the
temperature will be above 0°F
(–18°C), if possible.
W–2027–1285
553 Loader
METRIC TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
Material
Thread Size
(Dia. x Pitch) Head Mark 4 Head Mark 7 Head Mark 10
M 5 x 0.8 3–4 ft.–lbs.
(4–5 Nm)
M 6 x 1.0 6–7 ft.–lbs. 6–9 ft.–lbs.
(8–9 Nm) (8–12 Nm)
M 8 x 1.25 6–9 ft.–lbs. 11–16 ft.–lbs. 18–25 ft.–lbs.
(8–12 Nm) (15–22 Nm) (24–34 Nm)
(18–24 Nm) (30–41 Nm) (49–68 Nm)
(30–41 Nm) (54–73 Nm) (94–118 Nm)
(49–68 Nm) (79–108 Nm) (157–186 Nm)
553 Loader
STANDARD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOLTS
The following table shows standard torque specifications for bolts with zinc
phosphate coating. Bolts purchased from Melroe that have zinc phosphate coating
are specified by the letter H following the part number.
THREAD
SIZE SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8
INCH. .250 80–90 110–120

LBS. (9,0–10,2) (12,4–13,6)
(Nm)
.3125 180–200 215–240
(20,3–22,6) 24,2–27,1)
.375 25–28 35–40
(34–38) (47–54)
.4375 40–45 60–65
(54–61) (81–88)
.500 65–70 90–100
(88–95) (122–136)
.5625 90–100 125–140
(122–136) (170–190)
.625 125–140 175–190
(170–190) (240–260)
FOOT .750 220–245 300–330
LBS. (300–330) (410–450)
(Nm)
.875 330–360 475–525
(450–490) (645–710)
1.000 475–525 725–800
(645–710) (985–1085)
1.125 650–720 1050–1175
(880–975) (1425–1600)
1.250 900–1000 1475–1625
(1200–1360) (2000–2200)
1.375 1200–1350 2000–2200
(1630–1830) (2720–2980)
1.500 1500–1650 2600–2850
(2040–2240) (3530–3870)
1.625 2000–2800 3450–3800
(2720–2980) (4680–5150)
1.750 2500–2750 4300–4800
(3390–3730) (5830–6500)
1.875 3150–3500 5500–6100
(4270–4750) (7450–8300)
2.000 3800–4200 6500–7200
(5150–5700) (8800–9800)
553 Loader
553ServiceManual#6724024(S/N513011001&Above)–SpecificationsSection
DECIMAL AND MILLIMETER EQUIVALENTS
FRACTIONS DECIMALS MM FRACTIONS DECIMALS MM

1/64 0.015625 — 0.397 33/64 0.515625 — 13.097
1/32 0.03125 — 0.794 17/32 0.53125 — 13.494
3/64 0.046875 — 1.191 35/64 0.546875 — 13.891
1/16 0.0625 — 1.588 9/16 0.5625 — 14.288
5/64 0.078125 — 1.984 37/64 0.578125 — 14.684
3/32 0.09375 — 2.381 19/32 0.59375 — 15.081
7/64 0.109375 — 2.778 39/64 0.609375 — 15.478
1/8 0.1250 — 3.175 5/8 0.6250 — 15.875
9/64 0.140625 — 3.572 41/64 0.640625 — 16.272
5/32 0.15625 — 3.969 21/32 0.65625 — 16.669
11/64 0.171875 — 4.366 43/64 0.671875 — 17.066
3/16 0.1876 — 4.762 11/16 0.6875 — 17.462
13/64 0.203125 — 5.159 45/64 0.703125 — 17.859
7/32 0.21875 — 5.556 23/32 0.71875 — 18.256
15/64 0.234375 — 5.953 47/64 0.734375 — 18.653
1/4 0.2500 — 6.350 3/4 0.7500 — 19.050
17/64 0.265625 — 6.747 49/64 0.765625 — 19.447
9/32 0.28125 — 7.144 25/32 0.78125 — 19.844
19/64 0.296875 — 7.541 51/64 0.796875 — 20.241
5/16 0.3125 — 7.938 13/16 0.8125 — 20.638
21/64 0.328125 — 8.334 53/64 0.828125 — 21.034
11/32 0.34375 — 8.731 27/32 0.84375 — 21.431
23/64 0.359375 — 9.128 55/64 0.859375 — 21.828
3/8 0.3750 — 9.525 7/8 0.8750 — 22.225
25/64 0.390625 — 9.922 57/64 0.890625 — 22.622
13/32 0.40625 — 10.319 29/32 0.90625 — 23.019
27/64 0.421875 — 10.716 59/64 0.921875 — 23.416
7/16 0.4375 — 11.112 15/16 0.9375 — 23.812
29/64 0.453125 — 11.509 61/64 0.953125 — 24.209
15/32 0.46875 — 11.906 31/32 0.96875 — 24.606
31/64 0.484375 — 12.303 63/64 0.984375 — 25.003
1/2 0.5000 — 12.700 1 1.000 — 25.400
1 mm = 0.03937’’ 0.001’’ = 0.0254 mm
U.S. TO METRIC CONVERSION

TO CONVERT INTO MULTIPLY BY
LINEAR Miles Kilometers 1.609
MEASUREMENT Yards Meters 0.9144
Feet Meters 0.3048
Feet Centimeters 30.48
Inches Meters 0.0254
Inches Centimeters 2.54
Inches Millimeters 25.4
AREA Square Miles Square Kilometers 2.59
Square Feet Square Meters 0.0929
Square Inches Square Centimeters 6.452
Acre Hectare 0.4047
VOLUME Cubic Yards Cubic Meters 0.7646
Cubic Feet Cubic Meters 0.02832
Cubic Inches Cubic Centimeters 16.39
WEIGHT Tons (Short) Metric Tons 0.9078
Pounds Kilograms 0.4536
Ounces (Avdp.) Grams 28.3495
PRESSURE Pounds/Sq. In. Kilopascal 6.895
WORK Foot–Pounds Newton–Metre 1.356
LIQUID VOLUME Quarts Liters 0.9463
Gallons Liters 3.785
LIQUID FLOW Gallons/Minute Liters/Minute 3.785
TEMPERATURE Fahrenheit Celsius 1.Subtract 32°
2. Multiply by 5/9
553 Loader
553–1
® Revision Number
8 April 1998
SERVICE MANUAL Date
REVISION ROUTE TO
ATTENTION
AFFECTING:
PARTS MANAGER
Product BOBCAT LOADER
SERVICE MANAGER X
Model 553 (S/N 513011001 & Above) SALES MANAGER
Manual No. 6724024 (11–95)
NOTICE Insert This Sheet With The Appropriate Manual For Future Reference.
The following pages are a revision to the 553 (S/N 513011001 & Above) Service Manual P/N 6724024 (11–95).
Take out and put in the revised pages as listed below:
TAKE OUT PUT IN
553 Cover 6724024 (11–95) 553 Cover 6724024 (11–95)
S/N 513011001 & Above
Europe Only – S/N 513031001 & Above
All Electrical Wiring Indexes, Legends and Diagrams All Electrical Wiring Indexes, Legends and Diagrams
(Printed November 1995) (Printed April 1998)

Bobcat 553 Service Manual SN 513011001-Above Europe Only - SN 513031001-Above

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Bobcat 553 Service Manual SN 513011001-Above Europe Only - SN 513031001-Above

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

5 Service

CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT

B-10731a B-12365 B-7469

B-11799 B-15231 B-15280

B-6590 B-6580 B-6589

1. Check that the ROPS/FOPS 9. Enclosure door latches must

2. Check that ROPS mounting 10. Bob–Tach wedges and

5. Machine signs must be legible 13. Check hydraulic fluid level,

7. Check for correct funtion of the 15. Lubricate the loader.

8. The parking brake must 16. Check the condition of the

18. Check the electrical charging

19. Check tires for wear and

20. Inspect for loose or broken

21. Operate the loader and check

22. Check for any field

23. Check for correct function of

Recommend to the owner that all

Warnings on the machine and in the This notice identifies procedures

Always use the serial number of the loader when

LOADER SERIAL NUMBER

The loader serial number plate is located on the inside of

Explanation of loader Serial Number:

Production Sequence (Series)

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

BUCKET BUCKET STEPS B–14241

1. Check that the ROPS/FOPS 9. Enclosure door latches must

2. Check that ROPS mounting 10. Bob–Tach wedges and

5. Machine signs must be legible 13. Check hydraulic fluid level,

7. Check for correct funtion of the 15. Lubricate the loader.

8. The parking brake must 16. Check the condition of the

18. Check the electrical charging

19. Check tires for wear and

20. Inspect for loose or broken

21. Operate the loader and check

22. Check for any field

23. Check for correct function of

Recommend to the owner that all

Warnings on the machine and in the This notice identifies procedures

Always use the serial number of the loader when

LOADER SERIAL NUMBER

The loader serial number plate is located on the inside of

Explanation of loader Serial Number:

Production Sequence (Series)

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

BUCKET BUCKET STEPS B–14241

TOWING THE LOADER

USING A BOOSTER BATTERY (JUMP STARTING)

Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine.

SERVICE SCHEDULE HOURS

ITEM SERVICE REQUIRED 8–10 50 100 250 1000

Instructions are necessary before operating or

LIFTING AND BLOCKING THE LOADER B–7023

Put jackstands under the front axles and rear

Put a floor jack under the rear of the loader [B].

Adequately designed ramps of sufficient

A loader with an empty bucket or no attachment must be

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

Never attempt to start the engine by pushing or

Do not push or pull the machine at more than

Never work on a machine with the lift arms up

Put jackstands under the rear corners of the loader.

Both sets of fasteners at the front of the

Never modify operator cab by welding,